Sie sind auf Seite 1von 486

CLC3200/iR C3200N

Facsimile Guide
Manuals for the Machine
The manuals for this machine are divided as follows. Please refer to them for detailed information.
The manuals supplied with optional equipment are included in the list below. Depending on the system
configuration and product purchased, some manuals may not be needed.
Guides with this symbol are PDF manuals included on the
Guides with this symbol are printed manuals. CD-ROM accompanying CD-ROM.

• Basic Operations
• Troubleshooting Reference Guide

• Copying Instructions
Copying Guide

• Mail Box Instructions


Mail Box Guide

• Sending Instructions
Sending Guide CD-ROM

• Fax Instructions Facsimile Guide


(This Document)
• Setting Up the Network Connection and
Installing the CD-ROM Software Network Quick Start Guide

• Remote User Interface Instructions


Remote UI Guide CD-ROM

• Network Connectivity and Setup Instructions


Network Guide CD-ROM

• Colour Network ScanGear Installation and Colour Network ScanGear


Instructions CD-ROM
User's Guide
• PS/PCL/UFR Printer Instructions
PS/PCL/UFR Printer Guide CD-ROM

• PCL Printer Driver Installation and


Instructions PCL Driver Guide CD-ROM

• PS Printer Driver Installation and Instructions


PS Driver Guide CD-ROM

• UFR Printer Driver Installation and


Instructions UFR Driver Guide CD-ROM
• Fax Driver Installation and Instructions
Fax Driver Guide CD-ROM
How This Manual Is Organised
Chapter 1 Introduction to Fax Functions

Chapter 2 Basic Sending Methods

Chapter 3 Basic Scanning Features

Chapter 4 Special Scanning Features

Chapter 5 Sending Documents

Chapter 6 Receiving Documents

Chapter 7 Special Fax Functions

Chapter 8 Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status

Chapter 9 Customising Communications Settings

Chapter 10 Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

Chapter 11 System Manager Settings

Chapter 12 Printing Communication Reports

Chapter 13 Troubleshooting

Chapter 14 Appendix

Includes the report samples, specifications, and index.

Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this manual is free of inaccuracies and omissions. However, as we are constantly improving our
products, if you need an exact specification, please contact Canon.
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Symbols Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Keys Used in This Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Displays Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Illustrations Used in This Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Legal Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xiii . xiii
R&TTE Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Super G3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Disclaimers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv

Chapter 1 Introduction to Fax Functions

What This Machine Can Do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2


Overview of the CLC3200/iR C3200N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine. Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Setting the Display Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Selecting the Type of Telephone Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Setting the Current Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Registering This Machine's Fax Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Registering Sender Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Registering the Unit's Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Flow of Fax Sending Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Placing Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Document Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Platen Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Feeder (DADF-K1) (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Cancelling a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Using the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Using the Stop Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
Using the System Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44

v
Chapter 2 Basic Sending Methods

Specifying Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2


Using the Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Using the New Address Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Specifying a Fax Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Specifying a User Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Using the One-Touch Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Using the Favorites Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Using a Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Checking/Changing a Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Erasing a Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

Chapter 3 Basic Scanning Features

Selecting a Scan Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2


Scan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Two-Sided Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Document Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Specifying the Document Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Registering the Specified Document Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Scan Exposure and Original Type Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Manual Exposure Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Original Type Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Automatic Exposure Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Chapter 4 Special Scanning Features

Two-Page Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2


Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Original Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Book Frame Erase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Binding Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Different Size Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Job Build . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Prevent Bleeding (Image Quality Adjustment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
User Preset Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Storing Scan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Naming a User Preset Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Erasing Scan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

vi
Chapter 5 Sending Documents

Sending Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2


Sending a Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Sending a Job to a User Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Delaying a Send Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Previewing Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Job Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Chapter 6 Receiving Documents

Receiving Print and Fax Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2


Receiving Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Processing Received Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Setting the Memory Lock Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Forwarding Received Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Erasing Received Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Available Paper Sizes.
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Chapter 7 Special Fax Functions

Sending with a Subaddress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2


Special Dialling.
Dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Calling from an Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Entering International Fax Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Fax Information Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Chapter 8 Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status

Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2


Checking Send Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Changing the Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Resending a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Printing the Send Job Status/Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Checking Fax Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Printing the Fax Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Checking the Status of Receive and Forwarded Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Checking Receive Job Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Printing the Receive Job Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Checking the Status of Jobs That Have Been Forwarded. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28

vii
Chapter 9 Customising Communications Settings

Communications Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2


Automatic Document Deletion.
Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Handling Documents That Fail to Be Forwarded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Standard Send Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Favorites Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Registering a Favorites Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Naming a Favorites Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Erasing a Favorites Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Initial Send Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Printing the TX Terminal ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Initialising TX Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Two-Sided Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Paper Drawer Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Reducing a Received Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Printing Footer Information on a Received Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
2 On 1 Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
User, TX, and RX Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Adjusting the Alarm and Monitor Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
ECM Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Pause Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Auto Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
ECM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50

Chapter 10 Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

Address Book Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2


About the Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Registering New Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Fax Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Group Addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Addresses Obtained via a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Editing Address Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Erasing Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Naming an Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Registering/Editing One-Touch Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Erasing One-Touch Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

viii
Chapter 11 System Manager Settings

System Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2


Communications Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Fax Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Memory RX Inbox Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Setting the Memory RX Inbox Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Storing Received Fax Documents in Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Memory Lock Start Time Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Memory Lock End Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
Manage/Access to Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
Address Book Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
Access Number Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
Forwarding Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
Storing Forwarding Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27
When Forwarding Destinations Do Not Match
the Forwarding Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-40
Checking/Changing Forwarding Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-46
Forwarding Received Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-48
Erasing Forwarding Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-49
Printing Forwarding Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-50
LDAP Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-52
Registering an LDAP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-52
Changing an LDAP Server Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-67
Erasing an LDAP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-69
Printing LDAP Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-70

Chapter 12 Printing Communication Reports

Report Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2


Specifying Report Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Send TX Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Fax TX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Fax Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Fax RX Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Printing Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
Address Book List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
User's Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21

ix
Chapter 13 Troubleshooting

When Problems Occur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2


Sending Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Receiving Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Other Situations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Self-Diagnostic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
List of Error Codes without Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Questions & Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Chapter 14 Appendix

Report and List Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2


Send Job List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Send TX Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Fax TX Report/Fax Error TX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Multiple Communication Result Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Fax RX Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
Confidential Fax Inbox Reception Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Fax Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Forwarding Conditions List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
Registered LDAP Server List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Address Book List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
User's Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21

x
Preface
Thank you for purchasing the Canon CLC3200/iR C3200N. Please read this manual thoroughly before
operating the machine in order to familiarise yourself with its capabilities, and to make the most of its many
functions. After reading this manual, store it in a safe place for future reference.

How to Use This Manual

Symbols Used in This Manual


The following symbols are used in this manual to explain procedures, restrictions, handling
precautions, and instructions that should be observed for safety.

WARNING Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons
if not performed correctly. In order to use the machine safely, always pay attention to
these warnings.

CAUTION Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons, or
damage to property if not performed correctly. In order to use the machine safely,
always pay attention to these cautions.

IMPORTANT Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items
carefully in order to operate the machine correctly, and to avoid damage to the
machine.

NOTE Indicates a clarification of an operation, or contains additional explanations for a


procedure. Reading these notes is highly recommended.

xi
Keys Used in This Manual
The following symbols and key names are a few examples of how keys to be pressed are
expressed in this manual:
• Touch Panel Display Keys:[Key Name]
Examples: [Cancel]
[Done]
• Control Panel Keys: <Key icon> + (Key Name)
Examples: (Start)
(Stop)
Hereafter, the following name substitutions take place:
• Transmission/Sending: TX
• Reception/Receiving: RX

Displays Used in This Manual


Screen shots of the touch panel display used in this manual are those taken when the iR C3200N
has the following optional equipment attached to it: the Colour Image Reader-C1, Feeder
(DADF-K1), Super G3 FAX Board, Resolution Switching Board, Saddle Finisher-N2, and Cassette
Feeding Unit-X1. Note that functions that cannot be used depending on the model or options, are
not displayed on the touch panel display.
The keys which you should press are marked with , as shown below.
When multiple keys can be pressed on the touch panel display, all keys are marked.
Select the keys which suit your needs.

1 Press
Press [Address Book/Server].
the desired User Inbox number.

Press this
Press this keykey for operation.
for operation.

xii
Illustrations Used in This Manual
Illustrations used in this manual are those displayed when the CLC3200/iR C3200N has the
following optional equipment attached to it: the Colour Image Reader-C1, Feeder (DADF-K1), and
Cassette Feeding Unit-X1.

Legal Notices

R&TTE Directive
This equipment (F142500/F142504) conforms with the essential
requirements of EC Directive 1999/5/EC.

We declare that this product conforms with the EMC requirements of EC


Directive 1999/5/EC at nominal mains input 230 V, 50 Hz although the
rated input of the product is 220 V-240 V, 50 Hz.

Use of shielded cable is necessary to comply with the technical


requirements of EMC Directive.

If you move to another EU country and are experiencing trouble please call
the Canon Help Desk.
(For Europe Only)
Canon Inc./Canon Europa N. V.

xiii
Super G3
Super G3 is a phrase used to describe the new generation of fax machines
that use ITU-T V.34 standard 33.6 Kbps* modems. Super G3 High Speed
Fax machines allow transmission times of approximately 3 seconds* per
page which results in reduced telephone line charges.

* Approximately 3 seconds per page fax transmission time based on


CCITT/ITU-T No.1 Chart, (JBIG, Standard Mode) at 33.6 Kbps modem
speed. The Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) currently
supports 28.8 Kbps modem speeds or slower, depending on telephone
line conditions.

Trademarks
Canon, the Canon logo, CLC, and iR are trademarks of Canon Inc.
Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Mac OS is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
IBM and OS/2 are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and other countries.
NetWare® and Novell are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. in the United States and other
countries.
NDS is a trademark of Novell, Inc.
Sun and Solaris are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and other countries.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation.
UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively X/
Open Company Limited.
Bitstream Inc. licenses the following fonts:
Dutch 801 Bold, Dutch 801 Bold Italic, Dutch 801 Italic, Dutch 801 Roman, Swiss 721 Bold, Swiss
721 Bold Oblique, Swiss 721 Oblique, Symbol.
Other product and company names herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners.

xiv
Copyright
Copyright 2003 by Canon Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means,
electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, or by any information storage or
retrieval system without the prior written permission of Canon Inc.

Disclaimers
The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT
LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE OR AGAINST INFRINGEMENT OF ANY
PATENT. CANON INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING
FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.

xv
xvi
Introduction to Fax Functions
This chapter explains what you should know before using this machine for faxing, and describes its
1
CHAPTER

main features.

What This Machine Can Do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2


Overview of the CLC3200/iR C3200N C3200N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Setting the Display Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Selecting the Type of Telephone Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Setting the Current Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Registering This Machine's Fax Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Registering Sender Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Registering the Unit's Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Flow of Fax Sending Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Placing Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Document Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Platen Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Feeder (DADF-K1) (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Cancelling a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Using the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Using the Stop Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
Using the System Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44

1-1
What This Machine Can Do
The CLC3200 and iR C3200N are packed with functions that make sending and receiving faxes
1 convenient.
Introduction to Fax Functions

Super G3 Fax Function


This machine's Super G3 fax function is
compatible with most Super G3 fax machines
used in office environments. Compared to
ordinary fax machines, Super G3 enables
Send
high-speed fax transmissions, thus reducing
transmission costs.

Increased Security with Subaddress Transmission


This machine's fax function is compatible with
ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union -
Telecommunication Standardization Sector) Subaddress
standard subaddress features. As long as the
remote party's fax machine supports
subaddress fax transmissions, you can send or
receive documents with increased security by
attaching a subaddress and a password to all of
your fax transactions. Password

ECM Function for High Quality Images


This machine's fax function is compatible with
ECM (Error Correction Mode). ECM corrects
distorted or poor quality fax transmissions that
arise from line noise. It enables you to send or
receive high-quality faxes even if the condition
of your telephone line is not ideal. ECM

1-2 What This Machine Can Do


Flexible Scan Features
This machine offers a variety of convenient Originals Fax
scanning features such as the scanning of
two-sided and book originals, as well as the
ability to merge and send documents that are
scanned separately. You can also set the
exposure and document size to match the type 1
of original that you are scanning. In addition,

Introduction to Fax Functions


you can store preferred scan settings and
retrieve them at any time.

Preview Function
The Preview function enables you to check the Original Preview
contents of documents before sending them.
This is useful in preventing mistakes.

Instant Address Search with LDAP


You can search for fax numbers stored on LDAP LDAP Server
(Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) servers
on the network and use them as recipients for
send jobs or store them in the Address Book.

Fax: 0123456789

What This Machine Can Do 1-3


Receiving Faxes in Memory
Received fax documents can be stored in the
Memory RX Inbox instead of being printed out. Memory RX
Inbox Memory
You can check the sender information and the Lock
number of pages that each fax contains before
printing it or forwarding it to another destination.
1
Print Send
Introduction to Fax Functions

Fax Reception

Automatic Forwarding
The machine can be set to automatically
forward received fax documents that match the
specified forwarding conditions to any
destination using the desired send settings. You
can forward fax documents to other fax Confidential
Forward
machines (relay function) or store received Fax Inbox
faxes that are confidential in Confidential Fax
Inboxes. The forwarding function can be set to
activate during any specified time. Since
received documents that do not match the
forwarding conditions can also be forwarded to
any desired destination, this function can be
used to sort and deliver received fax documents
to the appropriate destinations.
If the optional Colour Universal Send Kit is installed,
e-mail and I-fax addresses, and file servers on the
network can be specified as forwarding destinations.
Received I-fax can also be forwarded.

1-4 What This Machine Can Do


Overview of the CLC3200/iR C3200N
If you press [Fax], the Fax Basic Features screen appears. The Fax function enables you to scan
documents, and fax them to specified destinations. Alternatively, you can also store the scanned
documents in a User Inbox for processing at a later date.
1

Introduction to Fax Functions


Original

Scan

Inbox Fax

Group

Fax Inbox

IMPORTANT
• [Fax] is displayed as [Send] if the optional Colour Universal Send Kit is installed. For instructions on using the Send
functions, see the Sending Guide.
• You can use the Fax functions of the CLC3200/iR C3200N only if the optional Colour Image Reader-C1 is attached.

Overview of the CLC3200/iR C3200N 1-5


Fax Basic Features Screen
The screen on the left, which appears when [Fax] is selected,
is called the Fax Basic Features screen.

Displays the current scan settings.

Destination List
1 Displays a list of destinations.
Introduction to Fax Functions

1 See p. 3-2

Press to select the scan mode. (See "Selecting a Scan Mode," on p. 3-2.)

1 See p. 2-2

Press to select a destination from the Address Book or to search through the directory listing (LDAP)
on the network. (See "Using the Address Book," on p. 2-2.)

1 See p. 2-25

Press to check or change the destination


information selected from the destination list.
(See "Checking/Changing a Destination," on
p. 2-25.)

1 See p. 2-28

Press to erase the destination displayed in the destination list. (See "Erasing a Destination," on
p. 2-28.)

1 See p. 5-16

Press to recall previously set fax jobs including the stored destinations, scan settings, and send
settings. (See "Job Recall," on p. 5-16.)

1-6 Overview of the CLC3200/iR C3200N


1 See p. 3-5

Press to scan both sides of the original. (See "Two-Sided Originals," on p. 3-5.)

1 See p. 5-12 1

Introduction to Fax Functions


Press to verify the images before sending. (See "Previewing Originals," on p. 5-12.)

1 See p. 5-2

Press to set the send settings. You can specify various settings, such as setting for the document to
be sent at a specified time, or entering the sender's information. (See "Sending Methods," on p. 5-2.)

1 See p. 2-12

Press to recall the destinations and settings stored in a favorites button. (See "Using the Favorites
Buttons," on p. 2-12.)

1 See p. 2-10

Press to specify the destinations stored in a one-touch button. (See "Using the One-Touch Buttons,"
on p. 2-10.)

1 See p. 2-6

Press to specify addresses not stored in the Address Book. (See "Using the New Address Tab," on
p. 2-6.)

Overview of the CLC3200/iR C3200N 1-7


Scan Settings Screen
The screen on the left, which appears when you select
[Option] from the Scan Settings drop-down list, is called the
Scan Settings screen.
Display this screen to set the scan settings for sending
documents.

1
Introduction to Fax Functions

1 See p. 3-16

Press to select the resolution. (See "Resolution," on p. 3-16.)

1 See p. 3-7

Press to select the size of the original that you want to scan. (See "Document Size," on p. 3-7.)

1 See p. 3-2

Press to select a stored scanning mode and resolution. (See "Selecting a Scan Mode," on p. 3-2.)

1 See p. 4-31

Press to store or erase a scanning mode. (See "User Preset Keys," on p. 4-31.)

1 See p. 3-18

Press [ ] or [ ] to manually control the scan exposure. Press [A] to select or cancel the automatic
exposure control. (See "Scan Exposure and Original Type Settings," on p. 3-18.)

1 See p. 3-18

Press to select the type of original (Text /Photo, Photo, or Text) that you are going to scan. (See
"Scan Exposure and Original Type Settings," on p. 3-18.)

1-8 Overview of the CLC3200/iR C3200N


1 See Chapter 4

Press to use the special features available for


scanning.

Introduction to Fax Functions


1 See Chapter 8

Press to check the status or details of a send or received job, or cancel a job.

Overview of the CLC3200/iR C3200N 1-9


Things You Must Do Before Using This
Machine
This section describes the important setting registrations and procedures that must be done before
1 the machine is used for faxing operations.

IMPORTANT
Introduction to Fax Functions

If you attempt to use the machine without registering the necessary information correctly, the machine may not function
properly.

n Setting the Line Type


To set the type of telephone line connected to the machine, check whether it is a rotary dial
(rotary pulse) or a touch-tone type and make the correct setting. (See "Selecting the Type of
Telephone Line," on p. 1-11.)

n Registering the Sending Record


The sending record is printed at the top of the recording paper in the receiving machine.
The registered information is printed, as shown below. Depending upon the model of machine at
the receiving side, this information may appear on the display while communication is taking
place.
Sender's Name (TTI)

Date Time Fax Number Destination Name Page Number

Sender Information

• Date and Time


- The date and time of the transmission is recorded.
• Fax Number
- Your machine's fax number is recorded.
• Sender's Name (TTI)
- The name registered as the sender's name or unit's name is recorded.
• Destination Name
- If you send an original and select a destination from the Address Book, the stored
destination's name appears on the sending record. (See "Registering New Addresses," on
p. 10-4.)

1-10 Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine


• Page Number
- The current page number out of the total number of pages of the original is recorded.

NOTE
• You can set the machine so that the sending record is not printed. (See "Printing the TX Terminal ID," on p. 9-22.)
• If the machine is set so that the sending record is printed at the top of the recording paper, and not all of the items are
registered, only the required registered items and the total number of original pages are printed.

Setting the Display Language 1

Introduction to Fax Functions


If you decide to switch the display language, set the Language Switch setting to 'On' before
inputting characters.
If the Language Switch setting is set to 'Off', and then you set it to 'On' after inputting characters,
the characters may not be displayed correctly.
If this happens, either reenter the characters after setting the Language Switch setting to 'On', or
enter characters with the Language Switch setting set to 'Off'.

Selecting the Type of Telephone Line


Set the type of telephone line connected to the machine.
If you are not sure what type of telephone line you have, check with your local telephone company.
To operate the fax functions, you must know if the machine is connected to a tone or rotary pulse
line. The machine can be set to operate with either type of telephone line.
If this setting is incorrect, you will be unable to communicate with other machines. Be sure to check
the type of telephone line that you are using, and make the correct setting.

NOTE
The default setting is 'Tone'.

Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine 1-11


1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Communications Settings].

1
Introduction to Fax Functions

2 Press [User Settings].

1-12 Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine


3 Press [Tel Line Type].

Introduction to Fax Functions


4 line1 press [OK].
Select the type of telephone line1

If you do not know the telephone line type, call your telephone service provider for details.
The selected mode is set.

5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine 1-13


Setting the Current Date and Time
You can set the current date and time. The current date and time settings are used as standard
timer settings for functions that require them.
• GMT: The time at the Greenwich Observatory in England is called GMT
(Greenwich Mean Time).
1 • Time Zone: The standard time zones of the world are expressed globally in terms of
the difference in hours (± up to 12 hours) from GMT (± 0 hours). A time
zone is a region throughout which this time difference is the same.
Introduction to Fax Functions

• Daylight Saving Time: In some countries, time is advanced throughout the summer season. The
period in which this is applied is called "Daylight Saving Time."

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Timer Settings].

2 Press [Date & Time Settings].

1-14 Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine


3 Enter the current date (day, month, year) and time using - (numeric keys).

Introduction to Fax Functions


Enter the day and the month using four digits (including zeros).
Enter all four digits of the year, and the time in 24-hour notation as four digits without a space.
Examples:
May 6 1 0605
7:05 a.m. 1 0705
11:18 p.m. 1 2318

NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering values, press (Clear) 1 enter the values again, starting with the day.

l If you are setting the Time Zone:


t Press the Time Zone drop-down list 1 select the time zone where the machine is located.

Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine 1-15


NOTE
• The default setting is 'GMT 00:00'.
• If the desired time zone is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll through the list.

l If you are setting Daylight Saving Time:


t Press [On] 1 [Start Date].

1
Introduction to Fax Functions

t Select the month and day from the Month and Day drop-down lists, respectively.
t Press [-] or [+] to enter the time of day you want Daylight Saving Time to take effect 1 press [OK].

1-16 Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine


t Press [End Date] 1 make the settings in the same way as [Start Date] 1 press [OK].

Introduction to Fax Functions


NOTE
• If you set Daylight Saving Time, the machine automatically sets the standard time of the machine one hour forward at
the specified date and time.
• The default setting is 'Off'.
• You can also use - (numeric keys) to enter time, and (Clear) to clear your entry.
• You can change the value under <Hours> by pressing [-] or [+], even if you have entered the value using -
(numeric keys).
• The time can be set in one hour increments, from 0 to 23 hours.

4 Press [OK].

The selected mode is set.

5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine 1-17


Registering This Machine's Fax Number
You can store the machine's fax number. This number is printed on the document that you fax to
the receiving party.
The number may also be displayed on the touch panel display of the receiving party's machine,
depending on their type of machine.
1
1
Introduction to Fax Functions

Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Communications Settings] 1 [User Settings].


If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Selecting the Type of Telephone Line," on p. 1-11.

2 Press [Unit Telephone #].

1-18 Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine


3 Enter the machine's fax number using - (numeric keys) 1 press [OK].

Introduction to Fax Functions


[Space]: Use to insert a space between the area code and the local fax number.
[+]: Use to insert a country code. Insert a plus sign (+) after the country code, and before
the fax number.
s
s

[ ] [ ]: Press to move the cursor to the desired position.


[Backspace]: Use to delete the character immediately to the left of the cursor.
You can enter up to 20 digits for the fax number.
The selected mode is set.

NOTE
You can press (Clear) to clear your entry.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine 1-19


Registering Sender Names
You can register any name as the sender's name, such as the section or department name, or an
individual's name.
The registered sender's name can be displayed on the touch panel display of the receiving party's
machine and/or printed at the top of the documents that you send as the sender's information.
1 NOTE
You can set for the machine to display and/or print the sender's name instead of the name stored as the unit's name with
Introduction to Fax Functions

the Sender's Names setting from the Send Settings screen. (See "Sending a Fax," on p. 5-2.)

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Communications Settings] 1 [TX Settings] under


<Common Settings>.

1-20 Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine


2 Press [Sender's Names (TTI)].

Introduction to Fax Functions


NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [t] or [s] to scroll to the desired setting.

3 Select the number under which you want to register the sender's name 1 press
[Register/Edit].

You can register up to 99 sender names (01 to 99).


If the desired number is not displayed, press [t] or [s] to scroll to the desired number.
You can also enter and specify the number under which you want to register the sender's name
using - (numeric keys).
To delete a registered sender's name, select the number under which the name is registered 1 press
[Erase]. Only one sender name can be erased at a time.

Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine 1-21


4 Enter the sender's name 1 press [OK].

1
Introduction to Fax Functions

You can enter up to 24 characters for the sender's name.


To cancel registering the sender's name, press [Cancel].
The selected mode is set.

NOTE
• For instructions on how to enter characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the Reference Guide.
• To delete all of the entered characters, press (Clear).

5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

1-22 Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine


Registering the Unit's Name
Your name or company's name can be registered as the unit's name (a department name is
optional).
For example:
• Your name: John Smith
• Company name: Canon 1
• Company name and department: Canon-Accounting Dept.

Introduction to Fax Functions


When you send a document, the recipient's machine displays or prints your name or company's
name (and department's name, if applicable) as the sender's information on the recording paper.
Some fax models also display sender's information on the touch panel display during transmission.

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Communications Settings] 1 [TX Settings] under


<Common Settings>.
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Registering Sender Names," on p. 1-20.

2 Press [Unit Name].

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [t] or [s] to scroll to the desired setting.

Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine 1-23


3 Enter a name 1 press [OK].

1
Introduction to Fax Functions

You can enter up to 24 characters for the unit's name.


To cancel registering the unit's name, press [Cancel].
The selected mode is set.

NOTE
• For instructions on how to enter characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the Reference Guide.
• To delete all of the entered characters, press (Clear).

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

1-24 Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine


Flow of Fax Sending Operations
This section describes the flow of basic fax sending operations.

NOTE
1
• Before using the Fax function, it is useful to read the following topics:

Introduction to Fax Functions


- Main power and control panel power (See Chapter 1, "Before You Start Using This Machine," in the Reference
Guide.)
- Routine maintenance (See Chapter 7, "Routine Maintenance," in the Reference Guide.)
• The maximum number of send jobs that the machine can hold is 120 (including jobs with error codes). However, the
actual number of send jobs that can accumulate on the machine may be less than 120, depending on the following
conditions:
- When broadcast send to 256 destinations is specified (Maximum 64 jobs.)
- When send jobs are specified from the fax driver (Maximum 64 jobs. However, if broadcast send to more than 50
destinations is specified, every 50 destination is considered as one job.)
• You can print a report that contains the results of all send jobs. (See "Specifying Report Settings," on p. 12-4.)

1 Press the appropriate keys in accordance with the messages displayed on the touch
panel display.
If there are no messages displayed, proceed to step 2.

l If the message <You must insert a control card.> appears:


t Insert a control card into the optional Card Reader-D1.

The Fax Basic Features screen is displayed.

Flow of Fax Sending Operations 1-25


NOTE
For instructions on using the optional Card Reader-D1, see Chapter 3, "Optional Equipment," in the Reference Guide.

l If the message <Enter the Dept. ID and Password using the numeric keys.> appears:
t Press [Dept. ID] 1 enter the Department ID using - (numeric keys).
t Press [Password] 1 enter the password using - (numeric keys).
t Press (ID).

1
Introduction to Fax Functions

The Fax Basic Features screen is displayed.

NOTE
For instructions on using Department ID Management, see Chapter 6, "System Manager Settings," in the Reference
Guide.

2 Press [Fax].

The Fax Basic Features Screen

1-26 Flow of Fax Sending Operations


3 Place your originals.

Introduction to Fax Functions


NOTE
For instructions on placing your originals, see "Placing Originals," on p. 1-35.

4 Specify the destinations.

NOTE
• A maximum of 256 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 256 destinations, 64 new addresses,
including those obtained through a server, can be specified.) If you specify a group address, which is made up of
several destinations, the whole group is counted as one address.
• The icons that are displayed on the screen are explained below:
– : Group
– : Fax
– : Inbox

l If a destination is stored in the Address Book:


t Press [Address Book/Server] 1 select the desired destination. (See "Using the Address Book," on
p. 2-2.)

Flow of Fax Sending Operations 1-27


l If a destination is not stored in the Address Book:
t Press [New Address] 1 select a sending method 1 enter the desired destination. (See "Using the New
Address Tab," on p. 2-6.)

1
Introduction to Fax Functions

NOTE
A maximum of 64 new addresses and addresses obtained through a server (User Inboxes are not included in this count)
can be specified at the same time.

l If a destination is stored in a One-Touch Button:


t Press [One-touch Buttons] 1 select the one-touch button that contains the desired destination. (See
"Using the One-Touch Buttons," on p. 2-10.)

1-28 Flow of Fax Sending Operations


l If a destination is stored in a Favorites Button:
t Press [Favorites Buttons] 1 select the favorites button that contains the desired destination. (See
"Using the Favorites Buttons," on p. 2-12.)

Introduction to Fax Functions


l If you want to specify a destination using a server:
t Press [Address Book/Server] 1 search through the directory listing on the server (LDAP) to specify the
destination. (See "Using a Server," on p. 2-14.)

NOTE
A maximum of 64 new addresses and addresses obtained through a server (User Inboxes are not included in this count)
can be specified at the same time.

Flow of Fax Sending Operations 1-29


5 Press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 select a scan setting.

1
Introduction to Fax Functions

If you do not see the desired scan setting, press [t] or [s] to scroll through the list.
To change the Scan mode settings, select [Option] after pressing the Scan Settings drop-down list, and
adjust the settings. (See "Scan Settings," on p. 3-5.)

NOTE
For instructions on how to set the Scan mode, see "Selecting a Scan Mode," on p. 3-2.

1-30 Flow of Fax Sending Operations


6 Press [Send Settings] 1 enter the send settings 1 press [Done].

Introduction to Fax Functions


IMPORTANT
To be able to specify the sender's name, you must store the sender's name or unit's name beforehand. Sender's name
and unit's name are stored in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen). (See "Registering Sender Names," on p. 1-20 or "Registering the Unit's Name," on p. 1-23.)

NOTE
For instructions on how to specify the Send Settings, see "Sending Methods," on p. 5-2.

Flow of Fax Sending Operations 1-31


7 Press (Start).

1
Introduction to Fax Functions

If the following screen is displayed, follow the instructions on the touch panel display 1 press (Start)
once for each original. When scanning is complete, press [Done].

Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.

IMPORTANT
The size of the original is detected automatically. However, if the output paper in the machine at the receiving end is not
equal to the scanned size, the original image may be reduced in size to match it.

NOTE
If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify the images from the Preview screen
before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals," on p. 5-12.)

1-32 Flow of Fax Sending Operations


8 If you want to cancel sending, press (Stop).

Introduction to Fax Functions


NOTE
• You can press (Stop) to cancel a send job that is being scanned.
• For information on how to cancel a send job, see "Cancelling a Job," on p. 1-42.
• You can also cancel a send job from the System Monitor screen. (See "Using the System Monitor Screen," on p. 1-44.)

9 When scanning is complete, remove your originals.

10 If the optional Card Reader-D1 is attached, remove the control card.

NOTE
For instructions on using the optional Card Reader-D1, see Chapter 3, "Optional Equipment," in the Reference Guide.

Flow of Fax Sending Operations 1-33


11 If Department ID Management is set, press (ID).

NOTE
For instructions on using Department ID Management, see Chapter 6, "System Manager Settings," in the Reference
Guide.

1
Introduction to Fax Functions

1-34 Flow of Fax Sending Operations


Placing Originals
You can scan originals using this machine only if the optional Colour Image Reader-C1 is attached.
Place your originals on the platen glass or in the feeder, depending on the size and type of original 1
that you want to scan and send, and the send settings that you have specified.

Introduction to Fax Functions


NOTE
If the original has too many pages to be placed in the feeder all at once, use the Job Build mode on the Special Features
screen (press [Option] from the Scan Settings drop-down list). (See "Job Build," on p. 4-19.)

n Platen Glass
Place the originals on the platen glass when scanning bound originals (such as books and
magazines), originals on heavy or lightweight paper, and transparencies.

n Feeder
Place the originals in the feeder when you want to scan several originals at the same time, and
press (Start). The machine automatically feeds the originals onto the platen glass and scans
them. Two-sided originals can also be automatically turned over and scanned as two-sided
documents.

Document Sizes
The size of the original is automatically detected, and the document is scanned. However, if the
output paper in the machine at the receiving end is not equal to the scanned size, the original
image is either reduced in size to match the size of the output paper at the receiving end, or is
divided into parts before being sent.
The machine may be unable to detect the size of the original if it is a nonstandard paper size or a
bound original such as a book. In this case, specify the size at which you want to scan the original.
(See "Document Size," on p. 3-7.)

Placing Originals 1-35


Orientation
You can place an original either vertically or horizontally. Always align the top edge of your original
with the back edge of the platen glass (by the arrow in the top left corner), or the back edge of the
feeder.

Platen Glass
1
Introduction to Fax Functions

Place the original Place the original


face down. face down.

Vertical Placement Horizontal Placement

Feeder

Place the original Place the original


face up. face up.

Vertical Placement Horizontal Placement

NOTE
• If the top edge of the original is not aligned with the back edge of the platen glass (by the arrow in the top left corner) or
the back edge of the feeder, your original may not be scanned correctly, depending on the scan and send modes that
you have set.
• Originals of the following sizes can be placed either vertically or horizontally. However, the scanning speed for
horizontally placed originals is somewhat slower than for vertically placed originals. Place originals horizontally when
scanning with a Preset Zoom, such as when enlarging an A4 original onto A3 paper.
- Platen glass: A4, A5
- Feeder: A4
• Horizontally placed A4 and A5 originals are referred to as A4R and A5R.
• A3 originals must be placed horizontally.

1-36 Placing Originals


Platen Glass
You should use the platen glass when scanning bound originals (such as books and magazines),
originals on heavy or lightweight paper, and transparencies into memory. You should also place the
originals onto the platen glass when you want to scan an A3 original with an image that extends all
the way to the edges without the periphery of the original being cut off. (See "Document Size," on
p. 3-7.)
1
NOTE

Introduction to Fax Functions


The machine automatically detects the size of the following originals: A3, A4, A4R, and A5.

1 Lift the feeder/platen cover.

Sensor

IMPORTANT
This machine is equipped with an open/close sensor on the feeder/platen cover (see circled area in the above
illustration). When placing originals on the platen glass, lift the feeder/platen cover about 300 mm so that the sensor
detaches from the feeder/platen cover. If the sensor does not detach from the feeder/platen cover, the size of the
originals may not be detected correctly.

2 Place your originals face down.

Placing Originals 1-37


The surface of the original that you want to scan must be placed face down. Align the top edge of your
original with the back edge of the platen glass (by the arrow in the top left corner).

1
Introduction to Fax Functions

Place books and other bound originals on the platen glass in the same way.

NOTE
When you are enlarging an A4 or A5 original onto A3 paper, place the original horizontally on the platen glass, and align
it with the A4R or A5R marks.

3 Gently close the feeder/platen glass cover.

CAUTION
• Close the feeder/platen cover gently to avoid catching your hands, as this may result in personal
injury.
• Do not press down hard on the feeder/platen cover when using the platen glass to scan thick
books. Doing so may damage the platen glass and result in personal injury.

1-38 Placing Originals


IMPORTANT
• If you are placing the original on the platen glass, the size of the original is detected after the feeder/platen cover is
closed. Be sure to close the feeder/platen cover before scanning.
• If the original contains fine text or print, such as a map, the machine may need to read or scan the document several
times. Do not remove the original from the platen glass until you are sure that the machine has finished scanning it.

NOTE
• Remove the original from the platen glass when scanning is complete.
1

Introduction to Fax Functions


• The size of A5R originals cannot be detected. After pressing (Start), follow the instructions on the screen to specify
the original size. You can also manually select the paper size.

Placing Originals 1-39


Feeder (DADF-K1) (Optional)
You should use the feeder when you want to scan several originals at the same time. Place the
originals in the feeder and press (Start). The machine automatically feeds the originals onto the
platen glass and scans them into memory. Two-sided originals can also be automatically turned
over and scanned as two-sided documents.
You can place the following originals in the feeder's original supply tray:
1
• Weight: 52 to 105 g/m2
Introduction to Fax Functions

• Size: A3, A4, A4R, or A5


• Tray Capacity:
–A3: 15 sheets (80 g/m2)
–A4 or A5: 30 sheets (80 g/m2)

IMPORTANT
• Do not place the following types of originals in the feeder:
- Originals with tears or large binding holes
- Severely curled originals or originals with sharp folds
- Clipped or stapled originals
- Carbon backed paper or other originals which might not feed smoothly
- Transparencies and other highly transparent originals
• If the same original is fed through the feeder repeatedly, the original may fold or become creased, and make feeding
impossible. Limit repeated feeding to a maximum of 30 times (this number varies, depending on the type and quality of
the original).
• If the feeder rollers are dirty from scanning originals written in pencil, perform the feeder cleaning procedure. (See
Chapter 7, "Routine Maintenance," in the Reference Guide.)
• Always smooth out any folds in your originals before placing them in the feeder.

1 Adjust the slide guides to fit the size of your originals.

1-40 Placing Originals


2 Neatly place your originals with the side to be scanned face up in the original supply
tray.
Place your originals as far into the feeder as they will go, until the Original Set indicator is lit.

Introduction to Fax Functions


Original Set Indicator

IMPORTANT
• Do not add or remove originals while they are being scanned.
• When scanning is complete, remove the originals from the original output area to avoid paper jams.

Original Output Area

NOTE
• When you are enlarging A4 originals to A3 paper, place your originals horizontally.
• The scanned originals are output to the original output area in the order they are fed into the feeder.
• You can place different size originals together in the feeder if you set the Different Size Originals mode. However, the
length (vertical direction) of the different paper sizes must be the same. For example, A3 and A4 paper sizes can be
placed together. (See "Different Size Originals," on p. 4-17.)

Placing Originals 1-41


Cancelling a Job
This section explains how to cancel a send job in several ways.
1
Using the Touch Panel Display
Introduction to Fax Functions

You can cancel a send job by pressing [Cancel], when the job has been scanned with the optional
Colour Image Reader-C1 attached.

1 Press [Cancel] on the screen shown below, which appears while the machine is
scanning.

The send job is cancelled.

2 Remove your originals.

1-42 Cancelling a Job


Using the Stop Key
You can cancel a send job by pressing (Stop), when the job has been scanned with the optional
Colour Image Reader-C1 attached.

NOTE
You can press (Stop) only to cancel a send job that is being scanned.
1

Introduction to Fax Functions


1 Press (Stop).

The send job is cancelled.

2 Remove your originals.

Cancelling a Job 1-43


Using the System Monitor Screen
You can cancel a send job while it is waiting to be processed, or while it is being sent.

1 Press [System Monitor].


1
Introduction to Fax Functions

2 Press [Fax].

1-44 Cancelling a Job


3 Select [Send Job Status] or [Received Job Status].

Introduction to Fax Functions


4 Select the job to be cancelled 1 press [Cancel].

If the job that you want to cancel is not displayed, press [t] or [s] to scroll through the list.
You cannot select multiple jobs and cancel them all at once. Select and cancel one job at a time.
If a job is in the process of being sent, it may not be cancelled even if you press [Cancel].

Cancelling a Job 1-45


5 Press [Yes].

1
Introduction to Fax Functions

If you do not want to cancel the send job, press [No].


The message <Canceling...> appears for approximately two seconds on the touch panel display.
The send job is cancelled.

l To cancel a Sequential Broadcast:


t Verify the destinations of the send job 1 press [Cancel All] or [Cancel Current Job].

If you select [Cancel Current Job], the job that is currently being sent is cancelled.
If you do not want to cancel the send job, press [Cancel].
The message <Canceling...> appears for approximately two seconds on the touch panel display.
The send job is cancelled.

1-46 Cancelling a Job


NOTE
The cancelled job is displayed as <NG> (No Good) on the Log screen.

6 Press [Done].
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.

Introduction to Fax Functions

Cancelling a Job 1-47


Introduction to Fax Functions

1-48
Cancelling a Job
Basic Sending Methods
This chapter describes how to specify, check, change, and erase destinations.
2
CHAPTER

Specifying Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2


Using the Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Using the New Address Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Using the One-Touch Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Using the Favorites Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Using a Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Checking/Changing a Destination
Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Erasing a Destination.
Destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

2-1
Specifying Destinations
This section describes how to specify a destination for a fax job. You can select a destination
stored in the Address Book or a one-touch button, or specify a new address altogether. You can
also recall the destinations and settings stored in the favorites buttons.

2 Using the Address Book


Basic Sending Methods

You must specify the destination in order to send a document. If you store addresses in the
Address Book, you can easily select the desired destinations. Addresses are stored in Address
Book Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Registering New Addresses," on
p. 10-4.)

NOTE
• A maximum of 256 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 256 destinations, 64 new addresses,
including those obtained through a server, can be specified.) If you specify a group address, which is made up of
several destinations, the whole group is counted as one address.
• Address Books can be saved, imported, and transferred using the Remote User Interface. (See Chapter 2, "Checking
and Managing Functions," and Chapter 3, "Customizing Settings," in the Remote UI Guide.)

1 Press [Address Book/Server].

2-2 Specifying Destinations


2 Select the desired destination from the Address Book.

l If Access Number Management is set to 'On', and you want to select a destination that is
stored with an access number or in a private address book:
t Press [Access Number].

Basic Sending Methods


t Enter the access number for the private address book or destination using - (numeric keys) 1
press [OK].

If you press [No Access Number], the destinations that are not managed with the Access Number
setting are displayed.
If you press [Cancel], the display returns to the screen that was displayed before pressing [Access
Number].

Specifying Destinations 2-3


t Select the destination 1 press [OK].

2
Basic Sending Methods

l If Access Number Management is set to 'Off', or the destination is not stored with an
access number or in a private address book:
t Select the destination 1 press [OK].

You can specify multiple destinations.


Press the alphabet keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the range of entries. Press the same key again to return
to the full address list.
If the desired destination is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the desired destination.
You can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the list by pressing the Type drop-down list.
Press the Address Book/Server drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books (subaddress book 1
to 10, or one-touch buttons). Subaddress books categorize the addresses stored in the Address Book.
You can also specify a destination by searching the directory listings on a network server. (See "Using a
Server," on p. 2-14.)
The selected destination appears in the destination list on the Fax Basic Features screen.

2-4 Specifying Destinations


NOTE
• To display [Access Number], set Access Number Management to 'On'. To access Access Number Management, press
(Additional Functions) 1 [System Settings] 1 [Manage/Access to Address Book] 1 [Access Number
Management]. (See "Access Number Management," on p. 11-24.)
• To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark.
• To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination 1 press [Details].
• If you select only one destination, press (Start) to send from the Search Address Book/Server screen.
• You can erase the destinations selected from the Address Book before you scan the document. (See "Erasing a
Destination," on p. 2-28.)

Basic Sending Methods

Specifying Destinations 2-5


Using the New Address Tab
You must specify the destination in order to send documents. This section describes the procedure
for specifying a new destination that has not been stored in the Address Book.

NOTE
• If you frequently send documents to the same destinations, store these destinations in the Address Book beforehand.
(See "Registering New Addresses," on p. 10-4.)
• A maximum of 64 new addresses and addresses obtained through a server (User Inboxes are not included in this
count) can be specified at the same time.

2 Specifying a Fax Number


Dial the fax number of the recipient using - (numeric keys), , and on the control panel.
Basic Sending Methods

You can also dial several numbers in succession, and send the original to several destinations in a
single operation (Sequential Broadcast).

1 Press [New Address] 1 [Fax].

NOTE
If you press - (numeric keys), , or without pressing [Fax] on the New Address tab when no destination
is displayed on the Fax Basic Features screen, the screen for the step 2 appears and you can enter a fax number.

2-6 Specifying Destinations


2 Enter the recipient's fax number using - (numeric keys), , and .

Basic Sending Methods


[Pause]: Press to insert a pause of several seconds in the fax number that you are dialling. If you
insert a pause, the letter <p> is displayed between the numbers, and the letter <P> appears at the end of
the number. When dialling an overseas number, insert a pause after the country code, and also at the
end of the fax number. (See "Pause Time," on p. 9-45.)
[Tone]: Press when directly calling an extension line connected to a Private Branch Exchange
(PBX) that accepts only tone signals from a dial line. (See "Fax Information Services,"
on p. 7-9.)
[O] [P]: Press to move the position of the cursor.
[Backspace]: Press when a wrong number is entered. The number immediately to the left of the
cursor is deleted, enabling you to enter the correct number.
[R]: Press to use the R-key. (See "Special Dialling," on p. 7-5.)
[Next]: Press to specify another destination after specifying the first destination using the
numeric keys.
[Subaddress]: Press to set up the subaddress and password. This setting is optional.
[On-hook]: Press to use tone dialling. (See "Fax Information Services," on p. 7-9.)

IMPORTANT
You cannot insert a pause at the beginning of a number.

Specifying Destinations 2-7


NOTE
• You can enter up to 120 characters for the fax number.
• If you enter a pause at the end of number, the pause is always 10 seconds long.
• You can press (Clear) to clear your entry.

l If you are sending with a subaddress:


t Press [Subaddress] 1 enter the recipient's subaddress using - (numeric keys), , and .
t Press [Password] 1 enter the recipient's password using - (numeric keys), , and .
t Press [OK].

2
Basic Sending Methods

You can enter up to 20 digits each for the subaddress and password.
Press [Space] to insert a space.
Press [Backspace] to delete the last digit that you entered.
If the recipient did not set a password for the target subaddress, you do not need to enter a password.

IMPORTANT
If you attach a subaddress to your send job, make sure that the recipient's fax machine is compatible to ITU-T
(International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector) standard subaddress features.

NOTE
• You can press (Clear) to clear your entry.
• For instructions on sending documents with a subaddress, see "Sending with a Subaddress," on p. 7-2.

2-8 Specifying Destinations


3 Press [OK].
The specified destination appears in the destination list on the Fax Basic Features screen.

IMPORTANT
The fax number that you entered is not stored in the Address Book. It is deleted once the document is sent.

NOTE
• You can change or edit destinations from the Details screen before you scan your documents. (See "Checking/
Changing a Destination," on p. 2-25.)
• You can erase the specified destination from the destination list before you scan your documents. (See "Erasing a
Destination," on p. 2-28.)
2
Specifying a User Inbox

Basic Sending Methods


You can store a scanned document in a User Inbox. User Inboxes selected in the Fax function are
the same User Inboxes that you can select using the Mail Box function. If you include a User Inbox
in the destination to which you are sending your document, the document is stored in the selected
User Inbox for later use. Documents stored in a User Inbox can be printed and sent to other
destinations.

IMPORTANT
• Documents that are scanned using a paper size specified using [Other Size] under [Document Size Select] cannot be
stored in a User Inbox.
• Documents stored in a User Inbox are automatically erased after three days. However, you can change this setting.
(See Chapter 6, "Customizing Settings," in the Mail Box Guide.)

1 Press [New Address] 1 [Store In Usr Inbox].

Specifying Destinations 2-9


2 Select the desired User Inbox 1 press [OK].

2
Basic Sending Methods

User Inboxes specified as destinations correspond to the inboxes that appear on the Inbox Selection
screen for the Mail Box function.
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen, and the selected User Inbox is displayed in the
destination list.

NOTE
• You can erase the specified User Inbox from the destination list before you scan your documents. (See "Erasing a
Destination," on p. 2-28.)
• Only one User Inbox can be specified as the destination at a time.

Using the One-Touch Buttons


You can specify up to 200 destinations in one-touch buttons.
Follow this procedure to start a transmission and send a document with the press of a one-touch
button.

IMPORTANT
To use this feature, you must register destinations in one-touch buttons by pressing (Additional Functions) 1
[Address Book Settings] 1 [One-touch Buttons]. (See "Registering/Editing One-Touch Buttons," on p. 10-45.)

NOTE
A maximum of 256 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 256 destinations, 64 new addresses,
including those obtained through a server, can be specified.) If you specify a group address, which is made up of several
destinations, the whole group is counted as one address.

2-10 Specifying Destinations


1 Press [One-touch Buttons].

Basic Sending Methods


2 Select the desired one-touch button.

Specifying Destinations 2-11


Each one-touch button is assigned a three digit number. If you know the one-touch button's number, you
can press [ ] (one-touch button number) 1 use - (numeric keys) to enter the number for the
desired one-touch button.

2 One-touch Button Number


Basic Sending Methods

The selected destination appears in the destination list on the Fax Basic Features screen.

NOTE
• To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination 1press [Details].
• You can erase the specified destination from the destination list before you scan your documents. (See "Erasing a
Destination," on p. 2-28.)
• You can select multiple one-touch buttons.
• To cancel the selected one-touch button, press the one-touch button again.

Using the Favorites Buttons


If you frequently send documents with the same document settings to the same destination, store
these settings in a favorites button. Then, when you need to specify the destination, all you have to
do is select the favorites button containing your stored document settings and the desired
destination, and send your document.

IMPORTANT
To use this feature, you must first register the desired document settings and destinations in favorites buttons. (See
"Registering a Favorites Button," on p. 9-11.)

NOTE
A maximum of 256 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 256 destinations, 64 new addresses,
including those obtained through a server, can be specified.) If you specify a group address, which is made up of several
destinations, the whole group is counted as one address.

2-12 Specifying Destinations


1 Press [Favorites Buttons].

Basic Sending Methods


2 Select the desired favorites button.

The specified destination(s) appears in the destination list on the Fax Basic Features screen, and the
stored document settings are recalled.
NOTE
• To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination 1press [Details].
• You can erase the specified destination(s) from the destination list before you scan your documents. (See "Erasing a
Destination," on p. 2-28.)
• You can manually change the recalled settings from the selected favorites button before you send your documents.
• If you press another favorites button, the settings stored in that button are recalled.
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).
• If multiple destinations are stored under the selected favorites button, the destinations may not be listed in the order in
which they were set.

Specifying Destinations 2-13


Using a Server
You can specify a destination by searching the directory listings on the network using LDAP
(Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) servers. LDAP servers are for looking up a particular piece
of information, such as a recipient's name, fax number, or other contact information.

NOTE
• You may have to set up the LDAP servers beforehand, depending on the network environment.
• For more information on LDAP servers, see "LDAP Server Settings," on p. 11-52.
• You can send to a maximum of 64 destinations at the same time, including destinations that are specified through a
server.
2 • Only names and fax numbers can be obtained from the LDAP server.
• You cannot directly specify a destination that is obtained through a server as a forwarding destination. To specify the
destination as a forwarding destination, you must first store it in the Address Book. (See "Addresses Obtained via a
Basic Sending Methods

Server," on p. 10-21.)

1 Press [Address Book/Server].

2-14 Specifying Destinations


2 Press the Address Book/Server drop-down list 1 press [Search on Server].

Basic Sending Methods


3 Press the Server to Search drop-down list 1 select the desired server to search.

4 Specify the search criteria.

NOTE
• For instructions on how to enter characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the Reference Guide.
• If you want to search a destination that is registered with an e-mail address and a fax number, you can search the fax
number by entering the e-mail address as the search criterion.

Specifying Destinations 2-15


l To use Simple Search:
t Press [Name], [E-mail], or [Fax] 1 enter the name, e-mail address, or fax number for which to search
1 press [OK].

2
Basic Sending Methods

You can enter up to 128 characters for the name, e-mail address, or fax number.
You can also use - (numeric keys) to enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your entries.
The search criteria boxes that you do not fill out are not searched.
To make a more detailed search with multiple criteria, press [Detailed Search], and follow the
directions below. The search criteria you entered for Simple Search are continuously used in Detailed
Search.

l To use Detailed Search:


t Press [Detailed Search].

2-16 Specifying Destinations


t Press the search category drop-down list 1 select the desired search category.

Search Category

Basic Sending Methods


The available search categories are:
• [Name]: Search by name.
• [E-mail]: Search by e-mail address.
• [Fax]: Search by fax number.
• [Organisation]: Search by organisation name.
• [OrgnztionUnit]: Search by unit (e.g., departments in an organisation).
For example, if cn=user1, ou=salesdept, o=canon, c=jp is the distinguished name in the directory,
enter the organisation/organisationUnit of the user as follows:
organisationUnit=salesdept
organisation=canon

NOTE
• The organisation/organisationUnit can be used as search categories only if the information has been registered on the
LDAP server.
• Detailed Search by organisation/organisationUnit may not be performed depending on whether the attribute types
have been registered on the LDAP server, and the type of application on the server, such as Windows 2000 Server
with Active Directory.

Specifying Destinations 2-17


t Press the search condition drop-down list 1 select the desired search condition 1 press [Settings].

Search Condition

2
Basic Sending Methods

The available search conditions are:


• [contains]: The result must contain the entered name, e-mail address, fax number,
organisation, or organisational unit.
• [does not contain]: The result must not contain the entered name, e-mail address, fax number,
organisation, or organisational unit.
• [equals]: The result must be exactly the same as the entered name, e-mail address, fax
number, organisation, or organisational unit.
• [differs from]: The result must be different from the name, e-mail address, fax number,
organisation, or organisational unit that you entered.
• [begins with]: The result must begin with the same first few letters that you entered for the
name, e-mail address, fax number, organisation, or organisational unit.
• [ends with]: The result must end with the same last few letters that you entered for the
name, e-mail address, fax number, organisation, or organisational unit.

2-18 Specifying Destinations


t Enter the search criteria 1 press [OK].

Basic Sending Methods


You can enter up to 128 characters for the search criteria.
You can also use - (numeric keys) to enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your entries.
t Press [Add].

To continue adding more search criteria press [or] or [and] 1 repeat step 4.
• [or]: The machine searches and returns a result for either of the specified search criteria.
• [and]: The machine searches and returns a result for all of the specified search criteria.
To edit the search criteria, select the criterion that you want to edit 1 press [Edit] 1 [Settings]. To
delete search criteria, select the criterion that you want to erase 1 press [Erase].

Specifying Destinations 2-19


NOTE
• You can specify up to four different search criteria at a time.
• If you specify three or more search criteria, you cannot use both [or] and [and] together.
• If you press [Simple Search] after specifying search criteria on the Detailed Search screen, the display changes to the
Simple Search screen, and the specified detailed search criteria are deleted.

5 Press [Start Searching].

2
Basic Sending Methods

To cancel searching, press [Cancel].


To cancel searching while the machine is searching for your criteria, press [Cancel]. If the machine finds
some results before you press [Cancel], the search results are displayed.

IMPORTANT
The number of search results displayed will not exceed the maximum limit set in Register LDAP Server in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). If the desired destination is not displayed, either increase the maximum
number of addresses to search for or change the search criteria. (See "LDAP Server Settings," on p. 11-52.)

NOTE
If you press [Start Searching] without specifying any search criteria, all the addresses stored on the LDAP server are
displayed.

2-20 Specifying Destinations


l If the Enter Network Password screen is displayed:
t Press [User] 1 enter the user name 1 press [OK].

Basic Sending Methods


You can enter up to 128 characters for the user name.
The Enter Network Password screen is displayed if either one of the following is true:
• When Login Information in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) is set to 'Use', and <Display authentication dialog when searching> is set to 'On'
• If the user name, password, and/or domain name specified in Register LDAP Server in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is incorrect
t Press [Password] 1 enter the password 1 press [OK].

You can enter up to 24 characters for the password.

Specifying Destinations 2-21


NOTE
• For instructions on how to enter characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the Reference Guide.
• You can also use - (numeric keys) to enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your entries.
• After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks (*****) on the Enter Network Password
screen.

t Verify the settings 1 press [OK].

2
Basic Sending Methods

The search results are displayed.

6 Select the desired destination from the search results 1 press [OK].

To continue searching, press [Back].


You can specify multiple destinations.
If the desired destination is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the desired destination.

2-22 Specifying Destinations


If the optional Colour Universal Send Kit is installed, you can restrict the type of destinations displayed in
the list by pressing the Type drop-down list.

Basic Sending Methods


Colour Universal Send Kit is installed.

NOTE
• To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark.
• If you select only one destination, press (Start) to send from the search result screen.

7 Verify the message 1 press [OK].

The selected destination(s) appears in the destination list on the Fax Basic Features screen.

Specifying Destinations 2-23


NOTE
• To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination 1 press [Details].
• You can edit a destination from the Details screen before you scan your documents. (See "Checking/Changing a
Destination," on p. 2-25.)
• You can erase the specified destination(s) from the destination list before you scan your documents. (See "Erasing a
Destination," on p. 2-28.)

2
Basic Sending Methods

2-24 Specifying Destinations


Checking/Changing a Destination
You can check and change a specified destination before you scan your documents.

NOTE
• Only the destinations specified using the New Address tab and destinations obtained through a server can be
changed.
• For instructions on changing the specified destination after you scan your document, see "Changing the Destination," 2
on p. 8-7.

Basic Sending Methods


• You cannot change multiple destinations simultaneously.

1 Select the destination 1 press [Details].

If the destination that you want to check or change is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the
desired destination.

Checking/Changing a Destination 2-25


2 If necessary, check or change the destination's information.

l If the screen below is displayed:


t Check the destination's information 1 press [Done].

2
Basic Sending Methods

l If the destination has been specified using one of the sending


methods on the New Address tab:
t Check or change the destination's information 1 press [OK].

Change the destination's information in the same way that you specified it. (See "Using the New
Address Tab," on p. 2-6.)

2-26 Checking/Changing a Destination


l If the destination is obtained via a server:
t Check or change the destination's information 1 press [OK].

Basic Sending Methods


Change the destination's information in the same way that you specified a new address. (See "Using
the New Address Tab," on p. 2-6.)

l If the destination is a group address:


t To check the information of destinations registered in the group address, select one destination at a
time 1 press [Details].

t Check the destination's information 1 press [Done] 1 [Done].


The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.

Checking/Changing a Destination 2-27


Erasing a Destination
You can erase a specified destination from the destination list before you scan your documents.

2 1 Select the destination to be erased.


Basic Sending Methods

If the destination that you want to erase is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the desired
destination.

2 Press [Erase].

The selected destination is erased from the destination list.

2-28 Erasing a Destination


Basic Scanning Features
This chapter describes the basic scanning features.
3
CHAPTER

Selecting a Scan Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2


Scan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Two-Sided Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Document Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Scan Exposure and Original Type Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

3-1
Selecting a Scan Mode
You can set the scan mode that a document is scanned in. The machine has four preset scan
modes: Black 200 × 100 dpi, Black 200 × 200 dpi, Black 200 × 400 dpi, and Black 400 × 400 dpi.
Select the desired mode from the preset scan modes or user-defined scan modes (user preset
keys), according to the type of original you are sending.

NOTE
• If you want to use less memory and make the sending time shorter, use a low resolution mode.
3 • You can adjust the preset scan modes and create new scan settings. However, since changed scan settings are not
automatically saved, it is useful to store a new scan setting if you use it frequently. (See "User Preset Keys," on
Basic Scanning Features

p. 4-31.)
• The default setting is 'Black 200 × 100' dpi. You can change this setting in Edit Standard Send Settings, which is
accessed by pressing (Additional Functions) 1 [Communications Settings] 1 [TX Settings] under <Common
Settings>. (See "Standard Send Settings," on p. 9-9.)
• You can change the settings and assigned names for the four preset scan keys, and store them as user-defined scan
modes (user preset keys).
• In addition to the scan mode, you can store addresses and other send settings in the Favorites Buttons. (See
"Favorites Buttons," on p. 9-11.)
• If the optional Colour Universal Send Kit is installed, six scan modes are preset (ACS 200 × 200 dpi, ACS 300 × 300
dpi, Black 200 × 200 dpi, Black 300 × 300 dpi, ACS 600 × 600 dpi, Black 600 × 600 dpi). The default setting is 'ACS
200x200' dpi.

3-2 Selecting a Scan Mode


1 Place your originals 1 specify the destination.

Basic Scanning Features


For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic Sending Methods."

2 Press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 select a scan mode.

If you do not see the desired scan setting, press [N] or [M] to scroll through the list.

Selecting a Scan Mode 3-3


NOTE
• Newly selecting a scan mode after setting one cancels the scan mode and other scan features previously set.
• You can also select a scan mode by pressing [Option] of the Scan Settings drop-down list to display the Scan Settings
screen 1 press the Scanning Mode drop-down list 1 select a scan mode.

3
Basic Scanning Features

3 Press (Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel display
1press (Start) once for each original. When scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.

NOTE
• You can store the changed settings. (See "User Preset Keys," on p. 4-31.)
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 press [Option] 1 [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify the images from the Preview screen
before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals," on p. 5-12.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).

3-4 Selecting a Scan Mode


Scan Settings
To match the original you are sending, set the document size, resolution, exposure, and original
type.

NOTE
Changed scan settings are not saved. For instructions on how to save settings, see "User Preset Keys," on p. 4-31.

Two-Sided Originals 3
You can set the machine to automatically turn over two-sided originals placed in the feeder, so as

Basic Scanning Features


to scan each side separately.

IMPORTANT
• The Two-sided Original mode is available only if the optional Feeder (DADF-K1) is attached.
• The Two-sided Original mode cannot be used together with the Document Size Select (Other Size) or Two-page
Separation mode.
• When you are scanning originals with a horizontal (landscape) orientation, such as A4R, make sure to place them
horizontally in the feeder. If these originals are placed vertically, the back sides of the originals are scanned upside
down.

Scan Settings 3-5


1 Place your originals in the feeder 1 specify the destination 1 press [Two-sided
Original].

3
Basic Scanning Features

For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic Sending Methods."

2 Select the type of original 1 press [OK].

[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the original have the same top-bottom orientation.
[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the original have opposite top-bottom orientations.
The selected mode is set, and the display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.

3-6 Scan Settings


3 Press (Start).
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.

NOTE
• To cancel this setting, press [Two-sided Original] 1 [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify the images from the Preview screen
before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals," on p. 5-12.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).

Document Size
You can specify the document size before scanning originals whose size you need to manually
specify, such as transparencies. Specify the document size as well if you want to scan an A3 3
original with an image that extends all the way to the edges without the periphery of the original

Basic Scanning Features


being cut off. You can also store the specified document size.

IMPORTANT
• You cannot select [Auto] when scanning the following types of originals. Specify the size of these documents manually.
- Nonstandard size originals
- Highly transparent originals, such as transparencies
- Originals with an extremely dark background
- Originals smaller than A5 in size
• If the original is placed in the feeder, you cannot scan by selecting [Other Size] under [Document Size Select].

NOTE
The default setting is 'Auto'.

Scan Settings 3-7


Specifying the Document Size

1 Place your originals 1 specify the destination.


For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic Sending Methods."

2 Press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 press [Option].

3
Basic Scanning Features

3 Press [Document Size Select].

3-8 Scan Settings


4 Select the document size.

l If you want to scan a standard document size:


t Select the desired document size.

Basic Scanning Features


If you want to scan an A3 original with an image that extends all the way to the edges without the
periphery of the original being cut off, place the original on the platen glass 1 press [A3+]. (See
"Platen Glass," on p. 1-37.)

NOTE
To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].

l If you want to scan a nonstandard document size:


t Press [Other Size].

Scan Settings 3-9


t Enter the size of the document in millimetres using the numeric keys on the touch panel display.
t Press [X] (width) 1 enter a value.
t Press [Y] (height) 1 enter a value.
t Press [OK].

3
Basic Scanning Features

Y
Scanning
Area

When entering values in millimetres, you can also use - (numeric keys), and (Clear) to
clear your entries.
If you make a mistake when entering values, press [C] on the touch panel display 1 enter the correct
values.
If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter an appropriate value
appears on the screen.
The display returns to the Document Size Select screen.

NOTE
• To enter values in inches, press [Inch]. You must first specify to set Inch Entry in Common Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) to 'On'. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
• For instructions on how to enter values in inches, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the Reference Guide.

3-10 Scan Settings


l If you want to scan a registered document size:
t Press [Other Size].

Basic Scanning Features


t Press [Registered Size 1] or [Registered Size 2] 1 press [OK].

The display returns to the Document Size Select screen.

NOTE
• To select a registered size, you need to register the document size beforehand. (See "Registering the Specified
Document Size," on p. 3-13.)
• The registered document size is displayed on top of the key in which it is registered.

Scan Settings 3-11


5 Press [Done] 1 [OK].

3
Basic Scanning Features

The selected size is set, and the display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.

6 Press (Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel display
1 press (Start) once for each original. When scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.

NOTE
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 press [Option] 1 [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify the images from the Preview screen
before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals," on p. 5-12.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).

3-12 Scan Settings


Registering the Specified Document Size

1 Press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 press [Option].

Basic Scanning Features


2 Press [Document Size Select].

Scan Settings 3-13


3 Press [Other Size].

3
Basic Scanning Features

4 Press [Register Size].

3-14 Scan Settings


5 Press [Registered Size 1] or [Registered Size 2] 1 enter the document size in
millimetres using the numeric keys on the touch panel display.
t Press [X] (width) 1 enter a value.
t Press [Y] (length) 1 enter a value.
t Press [OK].

Basic Scanning Features


When entering values in millimetres, you can also use - (numeric keys), and (Clear) to
clear your entries.
If you make a mistake when entering values, press [C] on the touch panel display 1 enter the correct
values.
If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter an appropriate value
appears on the screen.
The selected size is set, and the display returns to the Other Size screen.
The registered document size is displayed on top of the key in which it is registered.

NOTE
• If you register a new document size into a key that has already been registered with a document size, the new
document size overwrites the registered document size.
• To enter values in inches, press [Inch]. You must first specify to set Inch Entry in Common Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) to 'On'. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
• For instructions on how to enter values in inches, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the Reference Guide.

6 Press [Cancel] 1 [Done] 1 [Cancel].


The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.

Scan Settings 3-15


NOTE
Pressing [Cancel] 1 [Done] 1 [Cancel] only registers the new document sizes in the selected key ([Registered Size 1]
or [Registered Size 2]), but does not activate them. If you press [OK] 1 [Done] 1 [OK], the new document sizes are
registered in the selected key ([Registered Size 1] or [Registered Size 2]), and activated at the same time.

Resolution
You can specify the resolution before scanning the original.

IMPORTANT
The maximum size of an image that you can send at 400 × 400 dpi resolution is A3. If the image exceeds this number of
pixels in either the horizontal or vertical direction, it may be cropped.

3 NOTE
• The default setting is '200x100 dpi (Normal)'.
• If the optional Colour Universal Send Kit is installed, default setting is '200x200 dpi'.
Basic Scanning Features

1 Place your originals 1 specify the destination.


For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic Sending Methods."

2 Press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 press [Option].

3-16 Scan Settings


3 Press the Resolution drop-down list 1 select a resolution 1 press [OK].

Basic Scanning Features


The selected mode is set, and the display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.

4 Press (Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel display
1 press (Start) once for each original. When scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.

NOTE
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down-list 1 press [Option] 1 [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify the images from the Preview screen
before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals," on p. 5-12.)
• To cancel all settings at once and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).

Scan Settings 3-17


Scan Exposure and Original Type Settings
You can set the scan exposure and select the original type before scanning the original.

Manual Exposure Adjustment


You can manually adjust the scan exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.

1 Place your originals 1 specify the destination.


For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic Sending Methods."

3
2 Press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 press [Option].
Basic Scanning Features

3 Press [ ] or [ ] to adjust the scanning exposure 1 press [OK].

3-18 Scan Settings


Press [ ] to move the indicator to the left to make the exposure lighter, or press [ ] to move it to the right
to make the exposure darker.
The selected mode is set, and the display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.

4 Press (Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel display
1 press (Start) once for each original. When scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.

NOTE
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down-list 1 press [Option] 1 [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify the images from the Preview screen
before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals," on p. 5-12.)
3
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).

Basic Scanning Features

Scan Settings 3-19


Original Type Selection
You can manually select the original type according to the type of image that you are scanning. The
following three original type modes are available for adjusting the image quality.

IMPORTANT
• Combinations of these three modes (Text/Photo, Photo, and Text) cannot be set at once. If you select one of these
modes, the previously set mode is cancelled.
• If you scan an original containing halftones, such as a printed photograph, the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy
pattern) may occur. If this happens, you can lessen this moiré effect by using the Sharpness mode. (See "Adjusting the
Contrast (Sharpness)," on p. 4-24.)

NOTE
If the original is a transparency, select the original type 1 adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level for the
original.

3 n Text/Photo Mode
This mode is best suited for scanning originals containing both text and photos, such as
Basic Scanning Features

magazines or catalogues.

n Photo Mode
This mode is best suited for scanning of photos printed on photographic paper, or photo
originals containing halftones (i.e., printed photos).

n Text Mode
This mode is best suited for scanning of text originals. Blueprints or penciled originals can also
be scanned clearly.

1 Place your originals 1 specify the destination.


For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic Sending Methods."

3-20 Scan Settings


2 Press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 press [Option].

Basic Scanning Features


3 Press the original type drop-down list 1 select the original type (Text/Photo, Photo, or
Text) 1 press [OK].

Original Type

Scan Settings 3-21


l If you want to adjust the text/photo processing priority level for [Text/Photo]:
t Press the original type drop-down list 1 press [Priority Level].

3
Basic Scanning Features

t Adjust to give the degree of priority to text or photo 1 press [OK] 1 [OK].

[Text Priority]: Priority is given to the faithful reproduction of text.


[Photo Priority]: Priority is given to the faithful reproduction of photos, with as little moiré effect
as possible.
The selected mode is set, and the display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.

4 Press (Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel display
1 press (Start) once for each original. When scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.

3-22 Scan Settings


NOTE
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down-list 1 press [Option] 1 [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify the images from the Preview screen
before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals," on p. 5-12.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).

Automatic Exposure Adjustment


The machine can automatically set the most appropriate exposure according to the density of the
original.

1 Place your originals 1 specify the destination.


For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic Sending Methods." 3

Basic Scanning Features


2 Press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 press [Option].

Scan Settings 3-23


3 Press [A] 1 [OK].

3
Basic Scanning Features

The scanning exposure is automatically adjusted to the level best suited to the quality of the original.
The selected mode is set, and the display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.

NOTE
Automatic exposure may not work with transparencies. If this happens, adjust the exposure manually by pressing [ ] or
[ ].

4 Press (Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel display
1 press (Start) once for each original. When scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.

NOTE
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down-list 1 press [Option] 1 [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify the images from the Preview screen
before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals," on p. 5-12.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).

3-24 Scan Settings


Special Scanning Features
This chapter describes how to set special scanning features.
4
CHAPTER

Two-Page Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2


Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Original Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Book Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Binding Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Different Size Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Job Build . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Prevent Bleeding (Image Quality Adjustment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
User Preset Keys.
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Storing Scan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Naming a User Preset Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Erasing Scan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

4-1
Two-Page Separation
This mode enables you to scan facing pages in a book or bound original to fit onto separate pages.

IMPORTANT
• The Two-page Separation mode cannot be used together with the Document Size Select (A3+ and Other Size),
Two-sided Original, Different Size Originals, or Binding Erase mode.
• Place your originals on the platen glass. The Two-page Separation mode cannot be used when the original is placed in
the feeder.

1 Place your originals on the platen glass 1 specify the destination.


4 If you want to scan your originals in the correct page order, begin scanning from the first open page of the
book or bound original.
Special Scanning Features

Place your originals face down with their top edge aligned with the back edge of the platen glass (by the
arrow in the top left corner).
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic Sending Methods."

2 Press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 [Option].

4-2 Two-Page Separation


3 Press [Special Features].

4 Press [Two-page Separation].


4

Special Scanning Features


The selected mode is set.

5 Press [Done] 1 [OK].


The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.

Two-Page Separation 4-3


6 Press (Start).
Follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel display 1press (Start) once for each original.
When scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.

IMPORTANT
If the original contains fine text or print, such as a map, the machine may need to read or scan the document several
times. Do not remove the original from the platen glass until you are sure that the machine has finished scanning it.

NOTE
• To cancel this setting, press [Special Features] 1 [Two-page Separation].
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 press [Option] 1 [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify the images from the Preview screen
before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals," on p. 5-12.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).

4
Special Scanning Features

4-4 Two-Page Separation


Frame Erase
This mode enables you to erase shadows and lines that appear when scanning various types of
originals.
The following three Frame Erase modes are available.

IMPORTANT
A combination of the three Frame Erase modes cannot be set. If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode
is cancelled.

n Original Frame Erase


This mode erases the dark borders and frame lines that appear around the scanned image if the
original is smaller than the selected record size. You can also use this mode to create a blank 4
border around the edge of the scanned image.

Special Scanning Features


n Book Frame Erase
This mode erases the dark borders, as well as the centre and counter lines that appear if you
are scanning the facing pages in a book or bound original.

n Binding Erase
This mode erases the shadows that appear on the scanned image from binding holes on
originals.

Frame Erase 4-5


Original Frame Erase
IMPORTANT
The Original Frame Erase mode cannot be used together with the Document Size Select (A3+, Auto, and Other Size) or
Different Size Originals mode.

1 Place your originals 1 specify the destination.


For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic Sending Methods."

2 Press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 [Option].

4
Special Scanning Features

3 Press [Special Features] 1 [Frame Erase].

4-6 Frame Erase


4 Press [Original Frame Erase].

5 Press [-] or [+] to set the frame erase width.


4

Special Scanning Features


When entering values in millimetres, you can also use - (numeric keys), and (Clear) to clear
your entries.
You can change the values by pressing [-] or [+], even if you have entered the values using -
(numeric keys).
If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter an appropriate value
appears on the screen.

NOTE
• To enter values in inches, press [Inch]. You must first specify to set Inch Entry in Common Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) to 'On'. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
• The default setting is '4 mm'. The maximum width that you can set for the Original Frame Erase mode is '50 mm'.

l If you want to set the same width for all four borders:
t Press [-] or [+] to set the frame erase width 1 press [Next].

Frame Erase 4-7


l If you want to set the top, left, right, and bottom widths independently:
t Press [Adjust Each Dim.].
t Select the frame erase border(s) 1 press [-] or [+] to set the respective frame erase width(s) 1 press
[Next].

4
To return to the screen for setting the same width for all four borders, press [Adjust All At Once].
Special Scanning Features

6 Select the original size 1 press [OK].

The selected mode is set, and the display returns to the Special Features screen.

IMPORTANT
You can set the Original Frame Erase mode only for the original paper sizes that are displayed on the screen.

NOTE
To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].

4-8 Frame Erase


7 Press [Done] 1 [OK].
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.

8 Press (Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel display
1 press (Start) once for each original. When scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.

NOTE
• To cancel this setting, press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 press [Option] 1 [Special Features] 1 [Frame Erase]
1 [Cancel].
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 press [Option] 1 [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify the images from the Preview screen
before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals," on p. 5-12.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).
4
Book Frame Erase

Special Scanning Features


IMPORTANT
The Book Frame Erase mode cannot be used together with the Document Size Select (A3+, Auto, and Other Size) or
Different Size Originals mode.

1 Place your original on the platen glass 1 specify the destination.


For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic Sending Methods."

Frame Erase 4-9


2 Press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 [Option].

4 3 Press [Special Features] 1 [Frame Erase].


Special Scanning Features

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 3 of "Original Frame Erase," on p. 4-6.

4 Press [Book Frame Erase].

4-10 Frame Erase


5 Press [-] or [+] to set the frame erase widths.
When entering values in millimetres, you can also use - (numeric keys), and (Clear) to clear
your entries.
You can change the values by pressing [-] or [+], even if you have entered the values using -
(numeric keys).
If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter an appropriate value
appears on the screen.

NOTE
• To enter values in inches, press [Inch]. You must first specify to set Inch Entry in Common Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) to 'On'. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
• The default settings are '10 mm' for [Centre] and '4 mm' for [Top], [Left], [Right], and [Bottom]. The maximum width that
you can set for the Book Frame Erase mode is '50 mm'.

l If you want to set the same width for all four borders:
t Press [Centre] and [Sides] 1 press [-] or [+] to set their respective frame erase widths 1 press [Next].

Special Scanning Features

Frame Erase 4-11


l If you want to set the top, left, centre, right, and bottom widths independently:
t Press [Adjust Each Dim.].
t Select the frame erase border(s) 1 press [-] or [+] to set the respective frame erase width(s) 1 press
[Next].

4
To return to the screen for setting the same width for all four borders, press [Adjust All At Once].
Special Scanning Features

6 Select the size of the bound original when it is open 1 press [OK].

The selected mode is set, and the display returns to the Special Features screen.

IMPORTANT
You can set the Book Frame Erase mode only for the original sizes that are displayed on the screen.

NOTE
To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].

4-12 Frame Erase


7 Press [Done] 1 [OK].
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.

8 Press (Start).
Follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel display 1 press (Start) once for each original.
When scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.

IMPORTANT
If the original contains fine text or print, such as a map, the machine may need to read or scan the document several
times. Do not remove the original from the platen glass until you are sure that the machine has finished scanning it.

NOTE
• To cancel this setting, press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 press [Option] 1 [Special Features] 1 [Frame Erase]
1 [Cancel]. 4
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 press [Option] 1 [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify the images from the Preview screen

Special Scanning Features


before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals," on p. 5-12.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).

Binding Erase
IMPORTANT
• The Binding Erase mode cannot be used together with the Document Size Select (A3+ and Other Size) or Two-page
Separation mode.
• Do not place originals with binding holes in the feeder, as this may damage the originals.

1 Place your originals on the platen glass 1 specify the destination.


For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic Sending Methods."

Frame Erase 4-13


2 Press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 [Option].

4 3 Press [Special Features] 1 [Frame Erase].


Special Scanning Features

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 3 of "Original Frame Erase," on p. 4-6.

4 Press [Binding Erase] 1 select the border where the binding holes are located.

The border is where the binding holes are located on the original, if you first visualize the original as being
face up.

4-14 Frame Erase


5 Press [-] or [+] to set the frame width 1 press [OK].

When entering values in millimetres, you can also use


your entries.
- (numeric keys), and (Clear) to clear 4
You can change the values by pressing [-] or [+], even if you have entered the values using -

Special Scanning Features


(numeric keys).
If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter an appropriate value
appears on the screen.
The selected mode is set, and the display returns to the Special Features screen.

NOTE
• To enter values in inches, press [Inch]. You must first specify to set Inch Entry in Common Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) to 'On'. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
• The default setting is '18 mm'. The maximum width that you can set for the Binding Erase mode is '20 mm'.

6 Press [Done] 1 [OK].


The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.

Frame Erase 4-15


7 Press (Start).
Follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel display 1 press (Start) once for each original.
When scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.

IMPORTANT
If the original contains fine text or print, such as a map, the machine may need to read or scan the document several
times. Do not remove the original from the platen glass until you are sure that the machine has finished scanning it.

NOTE
• To cancel this setting, press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 press [Option]1 [Special Features] 1 [Frame Erase]
1 [Cancel].
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 press [Option] 1 [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify the images from the Preview screen
before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals," on p. 5-12.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).
4
Special Scanning Features

4-16 Frame Erase


Different Size Originals
This mode enables you to scan different size originals together. However, the length (vertical
direction) of the different paper sizes must be the same. For example, A4 and A3 paper sizes can
be scanned together.

IMPORTANT
• The Different Size Originals mode cannot be used together with the Two-page Separation, Original Frame Erase, or
Book Frame Erase mode.
• If Document Size Select is set to anything but 'Auto', all the originals are scanned in the specified size. If you want to
scan the originals in their original sizes, make sure to set Document Size Select to 'Auto'.
• If the originals are placed in the feeder, make sure that the different size originals are of the same weight (paper type).
• You cannot mix originals of different length together, such as A3 and A5.
• If the Different Size Originals mode is set, the scanning speed is slower than normal.
4

Special Scanning Features


1 Place your originals 1 specify the destination.
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic Sending Methods."

2 Press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 [Option].

Different Size Originals 4-17


3 Press [Special Features] 1 [Different Size Originals].

The selected mode is set.


4
4
Special Scanning Features

Press [Done] 1 [OK].


The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.

5 Press (Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel display
1 press (Start) once for each original. When scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.

NOTE
• To cancel this setting, press [Special Features] 1 [Different Size Originals].
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 press [Option] 1 [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify the images from the Preview screen
before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals," on p. 5-12.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).

4-18 Different Size Originals


Job Build
This mode enables you to scan originals that are too many to be placed at once, by dividing them
into multiple batches. You can use both the feeder and the platen glass for scanning. The originals
are sent as one document, after all the batches have been scanned.

IMPORTANT
• The Job Build mode cannot be used together with the Document Size Select (Other Size) mode.
• You cannot change the scan settings while the machine is scanning originals in the Job Build mode. You need to set
the necessary scan settings beforehand, according to the type of originals.
• You can change or specify the following settings before scanning the next batch of originals (i.e., between batches):
the Document Size Select (Auto or manual) mode, scan exposure, original type, and 2-Sided Original mode.
• If you place your originals in the feeder, remove the originals from the original output area when the scanning of each
batch is complete.
• The maximum number of pages that can be sent at one time is 500. When using the Job Build mode, a message 4
appears to ask you if you want to send the job when 500 pages of originals have been scanned. If you select to send
the job, the scanned 500 pages are sent. If you cancel the job, the scanned pages are not sent.

Special Scanning Features


NOTE
• If you place different size originals in the feeder, set the Different Size Originals mode. However, the length (vertical
direction) of the different paper sizes must be the same. For example, A4 and A3 paper sizes can be placed together.
• If you want to scan one-sided and two-sided originals together, and if the first original is two-sided, set the 2-Sided
Original mode. Thereafter, you have to manually set or cancel the 2-Sided Original mode for each batch of originals
that you scan.

1 Place your originals 1 specify the destination.


For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic Sending Methods."

Job Build 4-19


2 Press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 [Option].

4 3 Press [Special Features] 1 [Job Build].


Special Scanning Features

The selected mode is set.

4 Press [Done] 1 [OK].


The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.

4-20 Job Build


5 Press (Start).
Scanning starts.

NOTE
• To cancel scanning, press [Cancel] or (Stop).
• To cancel this setting, press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 press [Option] 1 [Special Features] 1 [Job Build].
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 press [Option] 1 [Cancel].
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).

6 When scanning is complete, place your next batch of originals 1 press (Start).
If you want to change the scan settings, do so before pressing (Start).

Special Scanning Features


You can select the document size. (See "Document Size," on p. 3-7.)
You can adjust the scan exposure and change the original type setting. (See "Scan Exposure and
Original Type Settings," on p. 3-18.)
You can change the one-sided or two-sided original setting. (See "Two-Sided Originals," on p. 3-5.)

Job Build 4-21


l If the original is two-sided:
t Press [2-Sided Original].

t Select the type of two-sided original 1 press [OK].


4
Special Scanning Features

[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the original have the same top-bottom orientation.
[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the original have opposite top-bottom orientations.
Do not forget to set or cancel the 2-Sided Original mode, according to the type of originals that you
place next.
To cancel the 2-Sided Original mode, press [2-Sided Original] 1 [Cancel].
Repeat this step, if necessary.

IMPORTANT
If the original contains fine text or print, such as a map, the machine may need to read or scan the document several
times. Do not remove the original from the platen glass until you are sure that the machine has finished scanning it.

NOTE
[2-Sided Original] is displayed only if the optional Feeder (DADF-K1) is attached.

4-22 Job Build


7 After the last batch of originals is scanned, press [Done].

The scanned data is sent to the specified destination.


4
NOTE

Special Scanning Features


If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify the images from the Preview screen
before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals," on p. 5-12.)

Job Build 4-23


Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness)

This mode enables you to scan original images with a sharper or softer contrast. To scan text or
lines sharply, use the [High] setting. To scan originals containing printed photographs or other
halftones, use the [Low] setting.

n Low
If you want to scan an original containing halftones, such as a printed photograph, using the
Photo mode, the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. However, you can lessen
the moiré effect by using the [Low] setting to produce a clearer image.

n High
This setting enhances the edges of the original images so that faint or fine text is scanned with a
4 sharper contrast. This setting is particularly suited for scanning blueprints and faint pencil drawn
images.
Special Scanning Features

1 Place your originals 1 specify the destination.


For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic Sending Methods."

2 Press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 [Option].

4-24 Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness)


3 Press [Special Features] 1 [Sharpness].

4 Press [Low] or [High] to adjust the sharpness 1 press [OK].


4

Special Scanning Features


To scan text or lines clearly, use the [High] setting. To scan originals containing printed photographs or
other halftones, use the [Low] setting.
The selected mode is set, and the display returns to the Special Features screen.

5 Press [Done] 1 [OK].


The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.

Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness) 4-25


6 Press (Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel display
1 press (Start) once for each original. When scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.

NOTE
• To cancel this setting, press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 press [Option] 1 [Special Features] 1 [Sharpness]
1 [Cancel].
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 press [Option] 1 [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify the images from the Preview screen
before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals," on p. 5-12.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).

4
Special Scanning Features

4-26 Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness)


Prevent Bleeding (Image Quality Adjustment)

This mode enables you to scan originals by preventing the original image on the reverse side of
thin originals from bleeding through and being scanned as well.

IMPORTANT
The Prevent Bleeding mode cannot be used together with the automatic scan exposure setting.

1 Place your originals 1 select the destination.


For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic Sending Methods."
4
2 Press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 [Option].

Special Scanning Features

Prevent Bleeding (Image Quality Adjustment) 4-27


3 Press [Special Features] 1 [Image Qty Adjustment].

4 4 Specify the amount of bleeding that you want to prevent.


Special Scanning Features

l If optional Colour Universal Send Kit is installed:


t Press [Prevent Bleed-thru] 1 [Fine Adjustment].

NOTE
When sending a fax, [Remove Background] is disabled.

4-28 Prevent Bleeding (Image Quality Adjustment)


t Press [-] or [+] to specify the amount of bleeding that you want to prevent 1 press [OK] 1 [OK].

l If optional Colour Universal Send Kit is not installed:


t Press [-] or [+] to specify the amount of bleeding that you want to prevent 1 press [OK]. 4

Special Scanning Features


[-]: This setting prevents dark areas on the reverse side of the original from bleeding through and being
scanned, but light areas on the front side may not be scanned either.
[+]: This setting may not be able to completely prevent dark areas on the reverse side of the original from
bleeding through and being scanned, but light areas on the front side of the original are always
scanned.
The selected mode is set, and the display returns to the Special Features screen.

NOTE
If you make fine adjustments to the density, automatic scan exposure is cancelled and the original is scanned according
to the settings made under [Fine Adjustment].

Prevent Bleeding (Image Quality Adjustment) 4-29


5 Press [Done] 1 [OK].
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.

6 Press (Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel display
1 press (Start) once for each original. When scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.

NOTE
• To cancel this setting, press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 press [Option] 1 [Special Features] 1 [Image Qty
Adjustment] 1 [Cancel].
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 press [Option] 1 [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify the images from the Preview screen
before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals," on p. 5-12.)
4 • To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).
Special Scanning Features

4-30 Prevent Bleeding (Image Quality Adjustment)


User Preset Keys
You can set any possible combination of scan settings and store them in a user preset key in
memory. There are eight user preset keys, four of which have preset scan modes already set from
the factory. The remaining four user preset keys (P5 to P8) are available for the user to set and
store, and can be assigned names for increased convenience. You can also change the settings
and assigned names for the four preset scan keys, and store them as user-defined scan modes
(user preset keys). This feature is useful for storing frequently used scan settings.
Once user preset keys are stored, they are displayed in the Scan Settings drop-down list, and can
be selected in the same way as the four preset scan modes (Black 200 × 100 dpi, Black
200 × 200 dpi, Black 200 × 400 dpi, Black 400 × 400 dpi).

NOTE 4
The scan settings stored as user preset keys in memory are not erased, even if you turn the machine's power OFF.

Special Scanning Features


Storing Scan Settings

1 Press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 press [Option].

User Preset Keys 4-31


2 Specify the scan settings that you want to store.

NOTE
4 In the example above, the Document Size Select and the Job Build modes are specified.
Special Scanning Features

3 Press [Store/Erase].

4-32 User Preset Keys


4 Select a user preset key for storing the scan settings 1 press [Store].

User Preset Key

The icons that are displayed are explained below:


4
Icon Colour Mode Resolution

Special Scanning Features


Black-and-White 200 × 00 dpi, 200 × 200 dpi

Black-and-White 200 × 400 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi

(Not Stored)

NOTE
• Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a coloured triangle ( ) in the lower right corner of
the key.
• If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the current settings of that key are displayed.
• If there are more stored scan settings than are currently displayed, you can scroll through the list by pressing [N] or
[M].

User Preset Keys 4-33


l If you select a key without settings:
t A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to store the settings. Press [Yes].

To cancel storing the settings, press [No].


4
Once the settings are stored, the message <Stored in memory.> appears for approximately two
seconds on the touch panel display.
Special Scanning Features

The key in which you stored the settings is displayed with a coloured triangle ( ) in the lower right
corner of the key, and the settings are displayed.
The stored settings are displayed.

l If you select a key that already has settings stored in it:


t A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to overwrite the previous settings. Press [Yes].

To cancel storing the settings, press [No].


Once the settings are stored, the message <Stored in memory.> appears for approximately two
seconds on the touch panel display.
The stored settings are displayed.

4-34 User Preset Keys


5 Press [Done] 1 [OK].
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.

NOTE
You can also assign a name to a user preset key by pressing [Register Name].

Naming a User Preset Key

1 Press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 press [Option].

Special Scanning Features


2 Press [Store/Erase].

User Preset Keys 4-35


3 Select a user preset key to name 1 press [Register Name].

User Preset Key

NOTE
4 • Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a coloured triangle ( ) in the lower right corner of
the key.
Special Scanning Features

• If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
• You can also assign names to keys with no settings stored in them.
• If there are more stored scan settings than are currently displayed, you can scroll through the list by pressing [N] or
[M].

4 Enter a name 1 press [OK].

Two lines can be used for a user preset key name.


You can enter up to eight characters per line.
The assigned name appears on the key.

4-36 User Preset Keys


NOTE
• For instructions on how to enter characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the Reference Guide.
• If you press [OK] without entering any characters, the key name reverts to its current name (default P1 to P8).

5 Press [Done] 1 [OK].


The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.

Erasing Scan Settings

1 Press the Scan Settings drop-down list 1 press [Option].

Special Scanning Features


2 Press [Store/Erase].

User Preset Keys 4-37


3 Select the user preset key with the scan settings that you want to erase 1 press
[Erase].

User Preset Key

4 A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to erase the settings.


Special Scanning Features

IMPORTANT
Make sure to check the settings before erasing them.

NOTE
• Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a coloured triangle ( ) in the lower right corner of
the key.
• If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
• If there are more stored scan settings than are currently displayed, you can scroll through the list by pressing [N] or
[M].

4 Press [Yes].

If you do not want to erase the settings, press [No].

4-38 User Preset Keys


The message <Erased.> appears for approximately two seconds on the touch panel display.

The stored scan settings are erased.

NOTE 4
Key names are not erased. For instructions on changing a key name, see "Naming a User Preset Key," on p. 4-35.

Special Scanning Features


5 Press [Done] 1 [OK].
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.

User Preset Keys 4-39


Special Scanning Features

4-40
User Preset Keys
Sending Documents
This chapter describes the fundamental procedures for sending faxes, how to configure fax send
5
CHAPTER

settings, and other useful features.

Sending Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2


Sending a Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Sending a Job to a User Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Delaying a Send Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Previewing Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Job Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

5-1
Sending Methods
You can attach a document name and sender's name to the document that you send. Documents
can be sent without changing any of the send settings, or you can configure them to suit your
needs.
When you send a document, you can set to send a document at a preset time.

Sending a Fax
You can scan originals and send them as faxes.

1 Place your originals 1 specify the destination 1 press [Send Settings].


5
Sending Documents

5-2 Sending Methods


NOTE
• For instructions explaining how to place your originals, see "Placing Originals," on p. 1-35.
• For instructions on specifying addresses stored in the Address Book, see "Using the Address Book," on p. 2-2.
• For instructions on specifying addresses not registered in the Address Book, see "Using the New Address Tab," on
p. 2-6.
• For instructions on specifying addresses using the one-touch buttons, see "Using the One-Touch Buttons," on p. 2-10.
• For instructions on specifying addresses and settings using the favorites buttons, see "Using the Favorites Buttons,"
on p. 2-12.
• For instructions on specifying a destination by searching through the directory listings on a server on the network
(LDAP), see "Using a Server," on p. 2-14.
• You can also set the scanning mode for your documents. See "Selecting a Scan Mode," on p. 3-2.

2 Press [Sender's Names (TTI)].

Sending Documents
3 Select a sender's name 1 press [OK].

Sending Methods 5-3


The name registered under <00> is selected by default.
If the desired sender's name is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the desired sender's name.
You can also enter the number of the desired sender's name using - (numeric keys).

NOTE
• To use this feature, you must register sender's names beforehand. (See "Registering Sender Names," on p. 1-20.)
• If you set the unit's name in TX Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the unit's name is automatically
registered as <00>. To set the unit's name, press (Additional Functions) 1 [Communications Settings] 1 [TX
Settings] under <Common Settings> 1 [Unit Name]. (See "Registering the Unit's Name," on p. 1-23.)

4 Press [Done].

5
Sending Documents

The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.

5 Press [Start].
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel display
1 press (Start) once for each original. When scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.

NOTE
If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify the images from the Preview screen
before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals," on p. 5-12.)

5-4 Sending Methods


Sending a Job to a User Inbox
You can scan a document and store it in a User Inbox. If you include a User Inbox in the destination
to which you are sending your document, the document is stored in the selected User Inbox for
later use. Documents stored in a User Inbox can be printed and sent to other destinations. The
following procedure explains how to specify the document name. The document name that you
specify is the name given to the document for the purpose of identification within the User Inbox.

IMPORTANT
• A document stored in a User Inbox is automatically erased after three days. However, you can set the time that has to
elapse before the documents in an inbox are automatically erased. (See Chapter 6, "Customizing Settings," in the Mail
Box Guide.)
• No more documents can be stored in a User Inbox if any of the following conditions are true. (The numbers given
below may vary depending on the remaining capacity of the hard disk.)
- When 100 documents or images have been stored in the selected User Inbox.
- When a total of 1,000 documents or images have been stored in all of the inboxes.
- When a total of approximately 3,700 pages of documents or images have been stored in all of the inboxes.

NOTE
• It is recommended that you delete unwanted documents or image data from the inboxes to make space for storing new
documents.
• User Inboxes specified as destinations correspond to the inboxes that appear on the Inbox Selection screen for the
Mail Box function.
5
• Only documents that are scanned from the Fax Basic Features screen can be stored in a User Inbox.

Sending Documents
• For more information on the User Inbox feature, see the Mail Box Guide.

1 Place your originals 1 specify the desired User Inbox 1 press [Send Settings].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Sending a Fax," on p. 5-2.

NOTE
• For instructions explaining how to place your originals, see "Placing Originals," on p. 1-35.
• For instructions on specifying a User Inbox as a destination, see "Specifying a User Inbox," on p. 2-9.
• For instructions on specifying addresses and settings using the favorites buttons, see "Using the Favorites Buttons,"
on p. 2-12.
• You can also set the scanning mode for your documents. See "Selecting a Scan Mode," on p. 3-2.

Sending Methods 5-5


2 Press [Send Doc. Name].

3 Enter the name of the document 1 press [OK].

5
Sending Documents

You can enter up to 24 characters for the document name.


You can also use - (numeric keys) to enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your entries.

NOTE
For instructions on how to enter characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the Reference Guide .

5-6 Sending Methods


4 Press [Done].

The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.

5 Press (Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel display 5
1 press (Start) once for each original. When scanning is complete, press [Done].

Sending Documents
Scanning starts.
The document is stored in the selected User Inbox with the name that you specified in step 3 when
scanning is complete.

NOTE
If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify the images from the Preview screen
before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals," on p. 5-12.)

Sending Methods 5-7


Delaying a Send Job
The Delayed Send mode enables you to store a fax send job in memory, and have it sent at a later
time.
If multiple jobs reach their delayed send time simultaneously, documents are sent in the following
order:

Three Destinations
Job A Two
Destinations
One
Job A Destination Job C

Job A Job B Job C

Job Job Job Job Job Job


5 A C A C B A

Sent to one destination for each job


Sending Documents

job

NOTE
• You can reserve up to 120 jobs for delayed sending. However, the actual number of jobs that can be reserved may be
less than 120 when multiple documents are being sent at the same time or in other cases.
• The number of delayed send jobs could also be reduced if there are other jobs with no Delayed Send settings, or
depending upon other factors affecting the specified destinations.
• Once the delayed documents are sent, the documents are automatically deleted from memory.
• You can check the status, cancel, or change the destinations of documents for which a preset send time has been
specified. (See "Using the System Monitor Screen," on p. 1-44, and Chapter 8, "Checking/Changing the Send/Receive
Status.")

5-8 Sending Methods


1 Place your originals 1 specify the destination 1 press [Send Settings].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Sending a Fax," on p. 5-2.

NOTE
• For instructions explaining how to place your originals, see "Placing Originals," on p. 1-35.
• For instructions on specifying addresses stored in the Address Book, see "Using the Address Book," on p. 2-2.
• For instructions on specifying addresses not registered in the Address Book, see "Using the New Address Tab," on
p. 2-6.
• For instructions on specifying addresses using the one-touch buttons, see "Using the One-Touch Buttons," on p. 2-10.
• For instructions on specifying addresses and settings using the favorites buttons, see "Using the Favorites Buttons,"
on p. 2-12.
• For instructions on specifying a destination by searching through the directory listings on a server on the network
(LDAP), see "Using a Server," on p. 2-14.
• You can also set the scanning mode for your documents. See "Selecting a Scan Mode," on p. 3-2.

2 Press [Delayed Send].

Sending Documents

Sending Methods 5-9


3 Enter the send time using - (numeric keys).

Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
Examples:
7:05 a.m. 1 0705
5 11:18 p.m. 1 2318
If you set a time earlier than the current time, the document will be sent at that time on the next day.
Sending Documents

NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the send time, press (Clear) 1 enter the correct time.

4 Press [OK] 1 [Done].


The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.

5-10 Sending Methods


5 Press (Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel display
1 press (Start) once for each original. When scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The document is stored in memory, and sent to the specified destination at the specified time.

NOTE
• To cancel a delayed fax job, press [Send Settings] 1 [Delayed Send] 1 [Cancel].
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify the images from the Preview screen
before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals," on p. 5-12.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard Send mode, press (Reset).
• You can also cancel a delayed fax job from the System Monitor screen. (See "Using the System Monitor Screen," on
p. 1-44.)

Sending Documents

Sending Methods 5-11


Previewing Originals
This feature enables you to preview the scanned data of your originals before sending it. You can
verify the scanned data of your originals on the Preview screen.

NOTE
The default setting is Off.

1 Place your originals 1 specify the destination 1 press [Preview].

5
Sending Documents

The [Preview] key is lit when it is set on.


The [Preview] key is not lit when it is set off.
The selected mode is set.

5-12 Previewing Originals


NOTE
• For instructions explaining how to place your originals, see "Placing Originals," on p. 1-35.
• For instructions on specifying addresses stored in the Address Book, see "Using the Address Book," on p. 2-2.
• For instructions on specifying addresses not registered in the Address Book, see "Using the New Address Tab," on
p. 2-6.
• For instructions on specifying addresses using the one-touch buttons, see "Using the One-Touch Buttons," on p. 2-10.
• For instructions on specifying addresses and settings using the favorites buttons, see "Using the Favorites Buttons,"
on p. 2-12.
• For instructions on specifying a destination by searching through the directory listings on a server on the network
(LDAP), see "Using a Server," on p. 2-14.
• You can also set the scanning mode for your documents. See "Selecting a Scan Mode," on p. 3-2.

2 Press (Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel display
1 press (Start) once for each original. When scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The Preview screen is displayed when scanning is complete.

NOTE
If the Preview key is not lit, the Preview display setting is turned off, and the Preview screen is not displayed. In this case,
when scanning is complete, the scanned data is sent to the specified destination. 5

Sending Documents

Previewing Originals 5-13


3 [ O] or [P
Press [O [P] to specify the page that you want to verify.

To preview a specific page number, enter the page number using - (numeric keys) 1 press [OK].

5
Sending Documents

You can also press [O] or [P] to scroll through and preview the previous and next pages of your
document.
The image of the selected page is displayed on the Preview screen.

5-14 Previewing Originals


4 Verify the images 1 press [Start Send].

You can press [ ] (reduce) or [ ] (enlarge) to zoom in or out on the images.


You can press [O], [P], [N], or [M] to specify the area to display when you zoom in or out on the image.
On , you can verify the position of the image area displayed.
If you want to cancel the fax job, press [Cancel]. 5
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination.

Sending Documents

Previewing Originals 5-15


Job Recall
You can recall the last three destinations, scan settings, and send settings which have been set,
and then send your documents.

IMPORTANT
• The machine considers any one of the following operations a fax job:
- When settings, such as the destination, scan settings, and send settings, are specified, and the control panel power
switch, (Energy Saver), (Start), or (Reset) is pressed.
- When the Auto Clear mode activates after the send settings are specified.
• The Standard mode cannot be stored in memory.
• Identical send settings are stored only once in Recall memory.
• If Access Number Management is set to 'On', the Recall mode cannot be used.

NOTE
The three most recent settings that were stored in memory are not erased even when the power is turned OFF.

5
1 Place your originals 1 press [Recall].
Sending Documents

NOTE
For instructions explaining how to place your originals, see "Placing Originals," on p. 1-35.

5-16 Job Recall


2 Select [1 Before], [2 Before], or [3 Before] 1 confirm the settings 1 press [OK].

The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.

NOTE
• You can also check which send settings are stored in memory other than the currently displayed send settings by
pressing [N] or [M].
• You can change the settings in a recalled send job to send your documents.
5
• If there are multiple destinations stored in Recall memory, the order of the destinations shown in the list may not

Sending Documents
correspond to the order of their settings.

3 Press (Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel display
1 press (Start) once for each original. When scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.

NOTE
If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify the images from the Preview screen
before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals," on p. 5-12.)

Job Recall 5-17


Sending Documents

5-18
Job Recall
Receiving Documents
This chapter describes the basic reception features. You can receive document transmissions
6
CHAPTER

automatically, forward received documents to a specified destination, or print a received document from
memory.

Receiving Print and Fax Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2


Receiving Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Processing Received Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Setting the Memory Lock Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Forwarding Received Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Erasing Received Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Available Paper Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

6-1
Receiving Print and Fax Jobs
n Receiving Print Jobs
The machine receives and prints print jobs sent from a computer.

n Receiving Faxes
This machine's Fax function is compatible with G3 Fax.
You can set the machine to automatically forward received fax documents to specified
destinations. For details on how to set the settings for forwarding documents, see "Forwarding
Settings," on p. 11-26.

Receiving Documents

1 When documents are being received, the Processing/Data indicator on the control panel
flashes a green light.

6
Receiving Documents

NOTE
During reception, the transaction number and information related to the sender are displayed on the touch panel display.

6-2 Receiving Print and Fax Jobs


2 When document reception is complete, the Processing/Data indicator on the control
panel maintains a steady green light. This indicates that documents are stored in
memory.

NOTE
• The Processing/Data indicator flashes or maintains a steady green light even when machine enters the sleep mode.
• The Error indicator flashes when either the amount of available memory is low or paper needs to be loaded into a
paper drawer.

3 The document is printed.


The Processing/Data indicator goes out when documents stored in memory are printed. 6
NOTE

Receiving Documents
• If there is no paper on which the received documents can be printed, the received documents are stored in memory.
• The memory can hold a total of approximately 3,700 pages for sending and receiving documents.
• Documents stored in memory because the paper has run out, are automatically printed when paper is loaded into a
paper drawer.
• If a printing error occurs, the Error indicator flashes a red light.

Receiving Print and Fax Jobs 6-3


Processing Received Documents
When the machine receives fax documents, they are processed as shown below:

: Default settings or normal


operation
Sender
: Conditional operation

Receive

ON
Forwarded to
Forwarding Settings specified
Forwarding destination
Error
Reception OFF/Does Not
rejected Meet the *1
*2 Conditions Confidential
Fax Inbox
Destination(s)
Forward Stored Confirming Details,
Erase, Print of received
w/o documents
Conditions*3
Destinations Not
Stored *5
Store Handle
6 Documents with
Forwarding Store in the
Memory Lock Setting Errors*6 Status Screen
Receiving Documents

OFF Prints Confirming Details,


ON Resend, Change
Destinations, Erase of
documents with
Print Queue Print Queue transmission error
Memory RX Inbox
*4 Confirming Details, Erase, *4
Print, Send of received
documents

Prints Prints

*1 If Store/Print Received Doc. in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On',
forwarded documents are either printed or stored in the Memory RX Inbox.
*2 If the subaddress and password attached to the received document do not match the information registered in Forwarding
Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the document is rejected.
*3 If Forward w/o Conditions is set up in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), all
received documents that do not match the specified forwarding conditions are forwarded to the destination selected for
Forward w/o Conditions.
*4 If documents are received while paper is jammed, or paper or toner has run out, it is printed after the paper jam is cleared,
paper is loaded, or toner is added.
*5 If Erase Failed TX is set to 'Off' in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen), the status of any job with a forwarding error will be saved on the System Monitor screen.
*6 Documents with forwarding errors are handled as follows, depending on the settings for Handle Documents with Forwarding
Errors in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen):
• [Always Print]: All documents with forwarding errors are printed.
• [Store/Print]: Documents with forwarding errors are stored in the Memory RX Inbox when Memory Lock is turned 'On'.
If Memory Lock is turned 'Off', the documents are printed.

6-4 Receiving Print and Fax Jobs


NOTE
• If the memory is full, no additional jobs can be processed.
• For information on the following settings, see their respective sections:
- Memory RX Inbox and Fax Memory Lock (See "Storing Received Fax Documents in Memory," on p. 11-13.)
- Confidential Fax Inbox and Forwarding Settings (See "Forwarding Settings," on p. 11-26.)

Setting the Memory Lock Mode


You can set to store the received fax documents in the Memory RX Inbox without being printed.
After verifying the documents on the Memory RX Inbox screen, you can print or send them
whenever necessary.
If you set Use Fax Memory Lock to 'On', you can turn Fax Memory Lock for documents sent to the
Memory RX Inbox 'On' or 'Off' as necessary. If Fax Memory Lock is set to 'On', received documents
are stored in the Memory RX Inbox instead of being printed. (See Chapter 4, "Storing Received
Documents," in the Mail Box Guide.)

IMPORTANT
Documents cannot be received in memory in the following cases: (The actual numbers may be less than that given
below, depending on the conditions under which the hard disk is used.)
- When a total of 1,000 documents or images have been stored in all the inboxes
- When a total of approximately 3,700 pages of documents or images have been stored in all the inboxes

NOTE
To receive documents in memory, you must first set Use Fax Memory Lock to 'On'. (See "Storing Received Fax 6
Documents in Memory," on p. 11-13.)

Receiving Documents
Forwarding Received Documents
If you receive a fax document, and it conforms to the specified forwarding conditions, the document
is automatically forwarded to the specified destination. You can register the forwarding conditions
and destinations in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
(See "Forwarding Settings," on p. 11-26.)

NOTE
To be able to forward received documents, you must first set Validate/Invalidate to 'On' in Forwarding Settings in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Forwarding Settings," on p. 11-26.)

Receiving Print and Fax Jobs 6-5


Erasing Received Documents
You can erase any received document stored in the Memory RX Inbox or the Confidential Fax
Inboxes when memory is full.

NOTE
The memory is full when either of the following is true: (The actual numbers may be less than that given below,
depending on the conditions under which the hard disk is used.)
- When a total of 1,000 documents or images have been stored in all the inboxes
- When a total of approximately 3,700 pages of documents or images have been stored in all the inboxes

1 Press [Mail Box].

6
Receiving Documents

2 Select [Memory RX Inbox] or [Conf. Fax Inbox].

6-6 Receiving Print and Fax Jobs


[Memory RX Inbox]: To select a received document that has been stored in the Memory RX Inbox.
[Conf. Fax Inbox]: To select a received document that has been forwarded to the Confidential Fax
Inbox.

3 Select the desired inbox 1 select the document that you want to erase 1 press [Erase].

In the example above, [Memory RX Inbox] in Memory RX Inbox is selected.


Memory RX Inbox contains only one inbox.
If the desired inbox is not displayed on the Inbox Selection screen for the Confidential Fax Inboxes, press 6
[N] or [M] to scroll to the desired inbox.

Receiving Documents
If you enter the Inbox number using - (numeric keys) to select a Confidential Fax Inbox, make
sure to enter a 2-digit number 1 press [OK].
If you make a mistake when entering the User Inbox number, press (Clear) 1 enter the correct
number.
If the selected inbox is set with a password, enter the password using - (numeric keys) 1 press
[OK].
If there are more than seven stored documents, press [N] or [M] to display the other documents.
You can only select one document to erase at a time.

NOTE
• You can cancel a selection by pressing the document again.
• To cancel all documents, press [Clear Selection]. If you do so, [Clear Selection] changes to [Select All (Max 32 doc.)].
• If a document is stored in an inbox, that inbox is displayed with the icon.
• If an inbox is set with a password, a locked mark ( ) is displayed next to the icon of that inbox.
• If you make a mistake when selecting a Confidential Fax Inbox, press [Done] 1 select the correct inbox.

Receiving Print and Fax Jobs 6-7


4 Press [Yes].

If you do not want to erase the selected document, press [No].


The message <Erased.> appears for approximately two seconds on the touch panel display.
The selected document is erased.

5 Press [Done].
6 The display returns to the Inbox Selection screen.
Receiving Documents

6 Press [Fax].
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.

6-8 Receiving Print and Fax Jobs


Available Paper Sizes
When received documents are printed, they are printed from the paper drawer that has the same
size paper as the received document. If paper of the correct size is not available, the machine
automatically selects a different paper size in the following order. The paper size is automatically
selected in the same order, even if paper runs out during printing.

n Available Paper Sizes for Received Documents

A3 originals A3 1 A4* 1 A4R*


A4 originals A4 1 A4R 1 A3 1 A5 x 3 1 A5R x 3
A5 originals A5 1 A5R 1 A4 1 A4R 1 A3

*Received documents are automatically reduced before being printed on the paper size indicated.

IMPORTANT
Received documents can be printed on the following paper sizes and paper types:
- Paper Sizes: A3, A4, A4R, A5, or A5R
- Paper Types: plain, recycled, or colour 6
NOTE

Receiving Documents
• You can specify each paper drawer for the fax function. The default setting is 'On', except for the stack bypass. (See
Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
• You can set the machine to reduce received documents to 75%, 90%, 95%, or 97% if the document is larger than any
of the available paper sizes. (See "Reducing a Received Document," on p. 9-33.)
• You can change the order of paper selection. (See "Paper Drawer Selection," on p. 9-30.)
• You can set the machine to print received documents on both sides of the paper. (See "Two-Sided Printing," on
p. 9-28.)
• Received documents are output face down, in the order in which the pages are received.

Available Paper Sizes 6-9


6
Receiving Documents

6-10 Available Paper Sizes


Special Fax Functions
This chapter describes special fax sending and receiving features.
7
CHAPTER

Sending with a Subaddress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2


Special Dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Calling from an Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Entering International Fax Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Fax Information Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

7-1
Sending with a Subaddress
You can send or receive documents with ITU-T standard subaddresses and passwords (ITU-T is a
committee within the International Communications Union, established to set communications
standards). The subaddresses and passwords must be dialled in addition to the fax numbers. In
order for a transaction to succeed, the subaddresses and passwords on the sending and receiving
fax units must match.

IMPORTANT
Subaddresses cannot be used with [Redial].

NOTE
You can register a subaddress and password in a one-touch button or a favorites button. (See "Registering/Editing
One-Touch Buttons," on p. 10-45, or "Registering a Favorites Button," on p. 9-11.)

1 Place your originals 1 press [New Address] 1 [Fax].

7
Special Fax Functions

NOTE
For instructions on how to place your original, see "Placing Originals," on p. 1-35.

7-2 Sending with a Subaddress


2 Press [Subaddress].

3 Press - (numeric keys), , and to enter the subaddress and password.


t Press [Subaddress] 1 enter the recipient's subaddress.
t Press [Password] 1 enter the recipient's password.
t Press [OK].

Special Fax Functions


Press [Space] to insert a space.
Press [Backspace] to delete the last digit that you entered.
If the recipient did not set a password for the target subaddress, you do not need to enter a password.
The selected mode is set, and the display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.

NOTE
You can press (Clear) to clear your entry.

Sending with a Subaddress 7-3


4 Specify the sending destination 1 press (Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel display
1 press (Start) once for each original. When scanning is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.

NOTE
• If you are sending to a remote machine using a one-touch button or favorites button in which a subaddress and
password are registered, the registered subaddress and password are used.
• If the Preview key is lit, the Preview display setting is turned on, and you can verify the images from the Preview screen
before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals," on p. 5-12.)

7
Special Fax Functions

7-4 Sending with a Subaddress


Special Dialling
Enter fax numbers as described below when the CLC3200/iR C3200N is connected to an
extension, or when you want to enter international fax numbers.

n Calling from an Extension


When calling an outside line from an extension, the outside line access number (such as 0) is
normally dialled before the fax number of the destination. In the same manner, when the
CLC3200/iR C3200N is connected to an extension, the outside line access number needs to be
entered before fax numbers. You can also enter a pause time (i.e., the amount of time the
machine waits after dialling the outside line access number when calling from an extension)
together with these numbers.

n International Dialling
You can enter a pause time (i.e., the amount of time the machine waits after dialling the
international fax number) together with an international fax number.

Calling from an Extension


This section describes only the procedure for entering fax numbers.
For instructions on setting the R-key, see "Fax Settings," on p. 11-4. 7

Special Fax Functions


1 Place your originals 1 press [New Address] 1 [Fax].

NOTE
For instructions on how to place your original, see "Placing Originals," on p. 1-35.

Special Dialling 7-5


2 Press [R].

3 Press [Pause] 1 enter a fax number.

7
Special Fax Functions

Example: Enter 516 328 5841 as the fax number.


Press [Pause] after entering the outside line access number ('R' in the above example) and before
entering the fax number.
Enter the pause time equivalent in length to the time required for the outside line dial tone to be heard
after the outside line access number is called.
[Backspace]: Press when a wrong number is entered. The number immediately to the left of the cursor is
deleted, enabling you to enter the correct number.

7-6 Special Dialling


NOTE
• The pause time differs in length, depending on whether it is entered in the middle or end of a fax number.
– The pause time entered in the middle of a fax number (lower-case p) is set to four seconds long by default. This
length can be changed to any number between 1 and 15 seconds. (See "Pause Time," on p. 9-45.)
– The pause time entered at the end of a fax number (upper-case P) is set to 10 seconds long. (This length cannot be
changed.)
• Two or more pauses can be entered consecutively.

4 Press [OK].
The specified destination appears in the destination list on the Fax Basic Features screen.

Entering International Fax Numbers


Follow the procedure below to enter pauses with international fax numbers.

1 Place your originals 1 press [New Address] 1 [Fax].

Special Fax Functions

Special Dialling 7-7


2 Enter the international fax number 1 press [Pause].

Example:
International Dialling Code: 010
Country code: 1
Area code: 516
Fax number: 480-6700
[Pause]: Enter the pause time equivalent in length to the time required for the dial tone to be heard after
dialling is completed.
[Backspace]: Press when a wrong number is entered. The number immediately to the left of the cursor is
7 deleted, enabling you to enter the correct number.

NOTE
Special Fax Functions

• The pause time differs in length, depending on whether it is entered in the middle or end of a fax number.
– The pause time entered in the middle of a fax number (lower-case p) is set to four seconds long by default. This
length can be changed to any number between 1 and 15 seconds. (See "Pause Time," on p. 9-45.)
– The pause time entered at the end of a fax number (upper-case P) is set to 10 seconds long. (This length cannot be
changed.)
• Two or more pauses can be entered consecutively.
• The location of a pause and the actual pause time may differ depending on the telephone system. Contact your local
authorised Canon dealer or your local telephone company for further details.

3 Press [OK].
The specified destination appears in the destination list on the Fax Basic Features screen.

7-8 Special Dialling


Fax Information Services
Many fax information services for banks, airline reservations, hotel reservations, etc., require tone
dialling for their services. If your fax is connected to a rotary pulse line, follow this procedure to set
the fax temporarily for tone dialling.

NOTE
When you use the fax information services, you cannot specify a fax number stored in the Address Book or use the Job
Recall mode.

1 Press [New Address] 1 [Fax].

Special Fax Functions


2 Press [On-hook] 1 enter the number of the information service using - (numeric
keys).

Fax Information Services 7-9


IMPORTANT
When the optional Card Reader-D1 is attached, the line is disconnected if you press [On-hook], and remove the control
card while the line is engaged.

3 When your call is answered and you hear the recorded message of the information
service, press [Tone].

When using this machine with tone dialling, this step is not required.
The level of the dial tone can be adjusted by pressing [ ] or [ ].
After you press [Tone], a <T> appears on the touch panel display.

7
Special Fax Functions

7-10 Fax Information Services


4 Enter the numbers requested by the information service using - (numeric keys),
, and .

NOTE
If you require more information about the service, contact the company providing the service.

5 Press [RX Start] if you require a faxed copy of the information.

Special Fax Functions


If you do not require a faxed copy of the information, press [End].

Fax Information Services 7-11


7
Special Fax Functions

7-12 Fax Information Services


Checking/Changing
the Send/Receive Status
This chapter describes how you can check/change the status of send and receive jobs.
8
CHAPTER

Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2


Checking Send Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Changing the Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Resending a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Printing the Send Job Status/Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Jobs Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Checking Fax Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Printing the Fax Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Checking the Status of Receive and Forwarded Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Checking Receive Job Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Printing the Receive Job Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Checking the Status of Jobs That Have Been Forwarded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28

8-1
Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs
This section describes how to check/change the status of fax send jobs. For more information, see
Chapter 5, "Checking Job and Device Status," in the Reference Guide.
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status

NOTE
• If the optional Colour Universal Send Kit is installed, e-mail, I-fax, and send jobs to file servers can also be checked/
changed. (See Chapter 7, "Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status," in the Sending Guide.)
• The maximum numbers of jobs that are displayed are as follows:
- Status screen: 120 jobs
- Log screen: 100 jobs

Checking Send Job Details


You can check detailed information on any send job, such as the destination and the date and time
the job was specified.

1 Press [System Monitor].

8-2 Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs


2 Press [Send].

Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status


3 Select [Status] or [Log].

Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs 8-3


4 Select a job whose detailed information you want to check 1 press [Details].
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status

If the job that you want to select is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the job.

IMPORTANT
Send jobs specified from the fax driver cannot be checked, since the job status is not displayed. Press [Fax] to check
these jobs on the Send Job Status screen.

NOTE
If Erase Failed TX in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) is set to 'Off' when multiple destinations are selected for a send job, <Finished.> is displayed for those
destinations to which the job was sent successfully, and <Error> is displayed for those destinations that had
transmission errors. When multiple destinations are simultaneously specified for a send job, and you select and cancel
the transmission to any one of those destinations, or the retransmission of an error job or an interrupted job is completed
successfully, information on all of those simultaneously specified destinations is displayed on the Log screen.

8-4 Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs


l If you select a job with only one destination in [Status]:
t Check the details.

Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status


To change the destination, press [Change Destination]. (See "Changing the Destination," on p. 8-7.)
To resend the job, press [Resend]. (See "Resending a Job," on p. 8-11.)

l If you select a job with multiple destinations in [Status]:


t Check the details.
t Press [Broadcast List].

Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs 8-5


t Check the status for each destination.
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status

To change the destination, press [Change Destination]. (See "Changing the Destination," on p. 8-7.)
To resend the job, press [Resend]. (See "Resending a Job," on p. 8-11.)
If the destination that you want to check is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the destination.

l If you select a job in [Log]:


t Check the details.

5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

8-6 Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs


Changing the Destination
You can change the destination of a send job from the System Monitor screen.

IMPORTANT
• You can only change the destination for send jobs that have been cancelled due to a transmission error or jobs that
have been set with the Delayed Send mode and are still waiting in the send queue.
• To be able to change the destination for send jobs that have been cancelled due to a transmission error, you must first

Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status


set Erase Failed TX in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) to 'Off'. (See "Automatic Document Deletion," on p. 9-4.)
• You cannot change more than one destination at the same time. You also cannot change the destination of a whole
group at once.
• You cannot change the destination of a send job if another job with the same job number is being sent or is waiting in
the send queue. This restriction does not apply to Delayed Send jobs.
• If the total number of destinations, including the destinations specified by the Address Book and one-touch buttons that
have been changed, and new destinations or destinations specified by a server, has reached 64, you can no longer
change the destinations that have been specified by the Address Book or one-touch buttons.
• The destination of send jobs specified from the fax driver cannot be changed, since the job status is not displayed.

NOTE
• You cannot change the destination type. For example, you cannot change the destination of a job from fax number to
User Inboxes.
• If a job is specified to be stored in a User Inbox, you cannot change the inbox in which to store the job.

1 Press [System Monitor] 1 [Send].


If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Checking Send Job Details," on p. 8-2.

Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs 8-7


2 Press [Status].
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status

3 Select the job whose destination you want to change 1 press [Details].

If the job that you want to select is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the job.

8-8 Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs


4 Select the destination that you want to change.

l If there is only one destination:


t Press [Change Destination].

Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status


l If there are multiple destinations for same sending method:
t Press [Broadcast List].

Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs 8-9


t Select the destination that you want to change 1 press [Change Destination].
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status

If the destination that you want to select is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the destination.

5 Change the destination.

You can only change the fax numbers.

8-10 Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs


6 Press [OK].

Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status


The job is sent to the specified destination.

7 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

Resending a Job
You can resend jobs that are cancelled due to transmission errors.

IMPORTANT
• To be able to resend jobs that have been cancelled due to a transmission error, you must first set Erase Failed TX in
TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'Off'.
(See "Automatic Document Deletion," on p. 9-4.)
• Send jobs specified from the fax driver cannot be resent, since the job status is not displayed. 8

1 Press [System Monitor] 1 [Send].


If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Checking Send Job Details," on p. 8-2.

Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs 8-11


2 Press [Status].
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status

3 Select the job that you want to resend 1 press [Details].

If the job that you want to select is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the job.

8-12 Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs


4 Select the destination to resend the job to.

l If there is only one destination:


t Press [Resend].

Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status


l If there are multiple destinations for same sending method:
t Press [Broadcast List].

Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs 8-13


t Select the destination to resend the job to 1 press [Resend].
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status

If the destination that you want to select is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the destination.
The job is sent to the specified destination.

5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

8-14 Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs


Printing the Send Job Status/Log

1 Press [System Monitor] 1 [Send].


If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Checking Send Job Details," on p. 8-2.

Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status


Select [Status] or [Log].

[Status]: Press this key if you want to print the send job list (TX Reserve List).
[Log]: Press this key if you want to print the send job log (Activity Report (TX)).

3 Press [Print List].


8

IMPORTANT
The send job status/log specified from the fax driver cannot be printed, since the job status is not displayed.

Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs 8-15


NOTE
• The icons that are displayed on the left side of the list are explained below:
– : A job for which an Activity Report has already been printed.
– : A job for which an Activity Report has not yet been printed.
• The send job status/log can be printed only if A3, A4, or A4R (plain, recycled, or colour paper) is loaded in the paper
sources whose settings in Other in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) are set to 'On'. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)

4
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status

Press [Yes].

To cancel printing, press [No].


If you selected [Status], the TX Reserve List is printed. If you selected [Log], the Activity Report (TX) is
printed.

8 5 Press [Done].
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.

8-16 Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs


Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Jobs
This section describes how to check/change the status of fax jobs.
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status

NOTE
The maximum numbers of jobs that are displayed are as follows:
- Send Job Status screen: 64 jobs
- Received Job Status screen: 1 job
- Log screen: 100 jobs

Checking Fax Job Details


You can check detailed information on any fax job, such as the number of pages and the date and
time the job was specified.

1 Press [System Monitor].

8-17 Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Jobs


2 Press [Fax].
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status

3 Select [Send Job Status], [Received Job Status], or [Log].

l If you select [Send Job Status]:


t Select the job whose details you want to check 1 press [Details].

8-18 Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Jobs


If the job that you want to select is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the job.

l If you select [Received Job Status]:


t Press [Details].

Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status


l If you select [Log]:
t Select the job whose details you want to check 1 press [Details].

If the job you want to select is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the job.

Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Jobs 8-19


4 Check the details.
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status

In the example above, [Send Job Status] is selected.


If multiple destinations are selected for a send job, [Broadcast List] is displayed. To check the status of
each destination, press [Broadcast List].

5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

8-20 Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Jobs


Printing the Fax Activity Report
You can print out the Fax Activity Report, which includes information such as the start time of the
job, destination, job number, transmission mode, number of pages, and transmission result.

1 Press [System Monitor] 1 [Fax].

Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status


If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Checking Fax Job Details," on p. 8-17.

2 Press [Log] 1 [Print List].

NOTE
• The icons that are displayed on the left side of the list are explained below: 8
– : A job for which a Fax Activity Report has already been printed.
– : A job for which a Fax Activity Report has not yet been printed.
• The Fax Activity Report can be printed only if A3, A4, or A4R (plain, recycled, or colour paper only) is loaded in the
paper sources whose settings in Other in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) are set to 'On'. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)

Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Jobs 8-21


3 Press [Yes].
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status

To cancel printing, press [No].


The Fax Activity Report is printed.

4 Press [Done].
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.

8-22 Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Jobs


Checking the Status of Receive and
Forwarded Jobs
This section describes how you can check the contents of documents received in memory and the
status of forwarded jobs. You can also print out the log for received jobs.

Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status


NOTE
Up to 100 jobs are displayed on the Activity Report (RX) screen.

Checking Receive Job Details


You can check detailed information on any received job, such as the destination and the date and
time the job was received.

1 Press [System Monitor].

Checking the Status of Receive and Forwarded Jobs 8-23


2 Press [Receive].
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status

3 Select a job whose detailed information you want to check 1 press [Details].

If the job that you want to select is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the job.

8-24 Checking the Status of Receive and Forwarded Jobs


4 Check the details of the selected job.

Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status


5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

Checking the Status of Receive and Forwarded Jobs 8-25


Printing the Receive Job Log
You can print the receive job log (Activity Report (RX)).

1 Press [System Monitor] 1 [Receive].


Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status

If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Checking Receive Job Details," on p. 8-23.

2 Press [Print List].

NOTE
• The icons that are displayed on the left side of the list are explained below:
8 –

: A job for which an Activity Report has already been printed.
: A job for which an Activity Report has not yet been printed.
• The receive job log can be printed only if A3, A4, or A4R (plain, recycled, or colour paper only) is loaded in the paper
sources whose settings in Other in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) are set to 'On'. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)

8-26 Checking the Status of Receive and Forwarded Jobs


3 Press [Yes].

Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status


To cancel printing, press [No].
The Activity Report (RX) is printed.

4 Press [Done].
The display returns to the Fax Basic Features screen.

Checking the Status of Receive and Forwarded Jobs 8-27


Checking the Status of Jobs That Have Been
Forwarded
You can check the details of jobs that have been forwarded, depending on the forwarding settings.

1
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status

Press [System Monitor] 1 [Receive].


If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Checking Receive Job Details," on p. 8-23.

1
2 Press [Forwarding Status].

8-28 Checking the Status of Receive and Forwarded Jobs


3 Select a job whose detailed information you want to check 1 press [Details].

Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status


If the job that you want to select is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the job.

NOTE
If 120 send jobs have accumulated on the Status screen, jobs that are waiting to be forwarded are displayed on the
Forwarding Status screen.

4 Check the details of the selected job.

5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

Checking the Status of Receive and Forwarded Jobs 8-29


Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status

8-30 Checking the Status of Receive and Forwarded Jobs


Customising Communications
Settings
This chapter describes how to store and change the default settings of the Send/Receive function to
9
CHAPTER

suit your needs.

Communications Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2


Automatic Document Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Handling Documents That Fail to Be Forwarded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Standard Send Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Favorites Buttons.
Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Registering a Favorites Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Naming a Favorites Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Erasing a Favorites Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Initial Send Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Printing the TX Terminal ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Initialising TX Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Two-Sided Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Paper Drawer Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Reducing a Received Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Printing Footer Information on a Received Document Document.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
2 On 1 Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
User, TX, and RX Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Adjusting the Alarm and Monitor Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
ECM Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Pause Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Auto Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
ECM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50

9-1
Communications Settings Table
The following items can be stored or set in Communications Settings, from the Additional Functions
screen.

n Common Settings

Applicable
Item Settings
Page
Customising Communications Settings

TX Settings
Sender's Names (TTI) 01 to 99: Register/Edit, Erase p. 1-20
Unit Name 24 characters maximum p. 1-23
Erase Failed TX On*, Off p. 9-4
Handle Documents with
Always Print, Store/Print, Off* p. 9-7
Forwarding Errors
Edit Standard Send Settings Scanning Mode p. 9-9
Register Favorites Button Register/Edit, Erase: M1 to M9 p. 9-11
Favorites Buttons, One-touch Buttons,
Default Screen for Send p. 9-20
New Address*
TX Terminal ID On*, Off p. 9-22
Initialise TX Settings Initialise p. 9-26
9 RX Settings
Two-sided Print On, Off* p. 9-28
Switch A: On*, Off
Switch B: On*, Off
Select Cassette p. 9-30
Switch C: On*, Off
Switch D: On*, Off
Receive Reduction On*, Off p. 9-33
Received Page Footer On, Off* p. 9-37
2 On 1 Log On, Off* p. 9-39
An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.

9-2 Communications Settings Table


n Fax Settings

Applicable
Item Settings
Page
User Settings
Unit Telephone # 20 digits maximum p. 1-18
Tel Line Type Pulse, Tone* p. 1-11
Alarm Volume: 0 to 8 levels (4*)
Volume Control p. 9-41
Monitor Volume: 0 to 8 levels (4*)
TX Settings
ECM TX On*, Off p. 9-43

Customising Communications Settings


Pause Time 1 to 15 seconds (4 seconds*) p. 9-45
Auto Redial On*, Off p. 9-46
RX Settings
ECM RX On*, Off p. 9-50

An asterisk (*) indicates the default settings.

NOTE
For instructions on how to set the modes not described in this manual, refer to the other manuals listed in the front of this
Facsimile Guide. (See "Manuals for the Machine," on p. ii.)

Communications Settings Table 9-3


Automatic Document Deletion
If transmission of a document has failed, this mode automatically erases that document from
memory.

NOTE
The default setting is 'On'.

1
Customising Communications Settings

Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Communications Settings].

9
2 Press [TX Settings] under <Common Settings>.

9-4 Automatic Document Deletion


3 Press [Erase Failed TX].

Customising Communications Settings


NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the desired setting.

4 Select [On] or [Off] 1 press [OK].

[On]: Erases jobs after sending, whether the transmission ends successfully or with an error.
[Off]: Stores a job in memory if the transmission ends in an error. You can resend error jobs via the
System Monitor screen, or change the destination to resend jobs. (See "Changing the
Destination," on p. 8-7, and "Resending a Job," on p. 8-11.)
The selected mode is set.

Automatic Document Deletion 9-5


IMPORTANT
Even when Erase Failed TX in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) is set to 'Off', send jobs specified from the fax driver are not stored in memory if the transmission ends
in an error.

5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.
Customising Communications Settings

9-6 Automatic Document Deletion


Handling Documents That Fail to Be
Forwarded
You can set how the machine handles the documents that fail to be forwarded.

NOTE
• The default setting is 'Off'.
• If Erase Failed TX is set to 'Off' in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen), the status of any job with a forwarding error will be saved on the System Monitor screen.
The document will not be processed according to the settings you make for Handle Documents with Forwarding Errors.
(See "Automatic Document Deletion," on p. 9-4.)

Customising Communications Settings


1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Communications Settings] 1 [TX Settings] under
<Common Settings>.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Automatic Document Deletion," on p. 9-4.

2 [M] until [Handle Documents with Forwarding Errors] appears 1 press


[ N] or [M
Press [N
[Handle Documents with Forwarding Errors].

Handling Documents That Fail to Be Forwarded 9-7


3 Select [Always Print], [Store/Print], or [Off] 1 press [OK].
Customising Communications Settings

[Always Print]: Documents that fail to be forwarded are printed.


[Store/Print]: Documents that fail to be forwarded are stored in the Memory RX Inbox. The machine
automatically prints out the documents that fail to be forwarded if Use Fax Memory
Lock is set to 'Off'. To access Use Fax Memory Lock, press (Additional Functions)
1 [System Settings] 1 [Communications Settings] 1 [Memory RX Inbox Settings] 1
[Use Fax Memory Lock]. (See "Storing Received Fax Documents in Memory," on
p. 11-13.)
[Off]: Documents that fail to be forwarded are not printed.
The selected mode is set.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

9-8 Handling Documents That Fail to Be Forwarded


Standard Send Settings
This mode enables you to change the standard settings for the Send function. (See "Selecting a
Scan Mode," on p. 3-2.)

NOTE
The default setting is 'Black 200x100' dpi.

Customising Communications Settings


Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Communications Settings] 1 [TX Settings] under
<Common Settings>.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Automatic Document Deletion," on p. 9-4.

2 [M] until [Edit Standard Send Settings] appears 1 press [Edit Standard
[ N] or [M
Press [N
Send Settings].

Standard Send Settings 9-9


3 Press the Scanning Mode drop-down list 1 select a scan mode 1 press [OK].
Customising Communications Settings

If the desired scan mode is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the desired scan mode.
You can also select a scan mode that you have already stored. (See "User Preset Keys," on p. 4-31.)
The selected mode is set.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

NOTE
To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).

9-10 Standard Send Settings


Favorites Buttons
You can set any possible combination of send settings and register them in a favorites button in
memory. There are nine favorites buttons and they can be assigned names for increased
convenience. This feature is useful for registering frequently used send settings.

NOTE
• The send settings registered as favorites buttons in memory are not erased, even if you turn the machine's power OFF.
• If an address included in a favorites button is deleted from the Address Book, it is also deleted from the settings
registered in the favorites button.

Customising Communications Settings


Registering a Favorites Button

1 Specify the send settings that you want to register.

NOTE
In the example above, the destination is specified, and the Two-sided Original mode and sender's name are set.
Two-sided scanning is available only if the optional Feeder (DADF-K1) is attached.

2 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Communications Settings] 1 [TX Settings] under


<Common Settings>.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Automatic Document Deletion," on p. 9-4.

Favorites Buttons 9-11


3 [M] until [Register Favorites Button] appears 1 press [Register Favorites
[ N] or [M
Press [N
Button].
Customising Communications Settings

4 Select a favorites button ([M1] to [M9]) for registering the send settings 1 press
[Register/Edit].

NOTE
Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a coloured triangle ( ) in the lower right corner of the
key.

9-12 Favorites Buttons


5 Press [Store].

Customising Communications Settings


NOTE
• If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
• If there are more stored send settings than are currently displayed, you can scroll through the list by pressing [N] or
[M].

l If you select a key without settings:


t A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to store the settings. Press [Yes].

To cancel storing the settings, press [No].


Once the settings are stored, the message <Stored in memory.> appears for approximately two
seconds on the touch panel display.
The stored settings are displayed.

Favorites Buttons 9-13


l If you select a key that already has settings stored in it:
t A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to overwrite the previous settings. Press [Yes].
Customising Communications Settings

To cancel storing the settings, press [No].


Once the settings are stored, the message <Stored in memory.> appears for approximately two
seconds on the touch panel display.
The stored settings are displayed.

6 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

NOTE
You can also assign a name to a favorites button by pressing [Name].

9-14 Favorites Buttons


Naming a Favorites Button

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Communications Settings] 1 [TX Settings] under


<Common Settings>.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Automatic Document Deletion," on p. 9-4.

2 [M] until [Register Favorites Button] appears 1 press [Register Favorites


[ N] or [M
Press [N
Button].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 3 of "Registering a Favorites Button," on p. 9-11.

Customising Communications Settings


Select a favorites button ([M1] to [M9]) to name 1 press [Register/Edit].

NOTE
Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a coloured triangle ( ) in the lower right corner of the
key. 9

Favorites Buttons 9-15


4 Press [Name].
Customising Communications Settings

NOTE
• If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the current settings of that key are displayed.
• You can also assign names to keys with no settings stored in them.
• If there are more stored send settings than are currently displayed, you can scroll through the list by pressing [N] or
[M].

5 Enter a name 1 press [OK].

Two lines can be used for a favorites button key name.


You can enter up to 10 characters per line.
The assigned name appears on the key.

9-16 Favorites Buttons


NOTE
• For instructions on how to enter characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the Reference Guide.
• If you press [OK] without entering any characters, the key name reverts to its current name (default M1 to M9).

6 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

Erasing a Favorites Button

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Communications Settings] 1 [TX Settings] under


<Common Settings>.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Automatic Document Deletion," on p. 9-4.

Customising Communications Settings


2 [M] until [Register Favorites Button] appears 1 press [Register Favorites
[ N] or [M
Press [N
Button].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 3 of "Registering a Favorites Button," on p. 9-11.

3 Select the favorites button with the send settings that you want to erase 1 press
[Erase].

A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to erase the settings.

IMPORTANT
Make sure to check the settings before erasing them.

Favorites Buttons 9-17


NOTE
• Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a coloured triangle ( ) in the lower right corner of
the key.
• If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the current settings of that key are displayed.
• If there are more stored send settings than are currently displayed, you can scroll through the list by pressing [N] or
[M].

4 Press [Yes].
Customising Communications Settings

If you do not want to erase the settings, press [No].


The message <Erased.> appears for approximately two seconds on the touch panel display.

The stored send settings are erased.

NOTE
Key names are not erased. For instructions on changing a key name, see "Naming a Favorites Button," on p. 9-15.

9-18 Favorites Buttons


5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

Customising Communications Settings


9

Favorites Buttons 9-19


Initial Send Screen Display
This mode enables you to set whether the [Favorites Buttons], [One-touch Buttons], or [New
Address] tabs will be displayed on the initial Fax Basic Features screen when the power is turned
ON, or the Auto Clear mode is activated.

NOTE
The default setting is 'New Address'.
Customising Communications Settings

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Communications Settings] 1 [TX Settings] under


<Common Settings>.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Automatic Document Deletion," on p. 9-4.

2 M] until [Default Screen for Send] appears 1 press [Default Screen for
[ N] or [[M
Press [N
Send].

9-20 Initial Send Screen Display


3 Select [Favorites Buttons], [One-touch Buttons], or [New Address] 1 press [OK].

Customising Communications Settings


The selected mode is set.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

Initial Send Screen Display 9-21


Printing the TX Terminal ID
The TX Terminal ID setting enables you to specify whether the Terminal ID information is printed at
the top of documents that you send by fax. Information such as your fax number and name are
printed, enabling the recipient to know who sent the document.

NOTE
• If you set TX Terminal ID to 'On', you can also set the position that the Terminal ID information is printed on the
recipient's paper.
• The default settings are:
Customising Communications Settings

- TX Terminal ID: On
- Printing Position: Outside
- Telephone # Mark: Fax

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Communications Settings] 1 [TX Settings] under


<Common Settings>.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Automatic Document Deletion," on p. 9-4.

2 [M] until [TX Terminal ID] appears 1 press [TX Terminal ID].
[ N] or [M
Press [N

9-22 Printing the TX Terminal ID


3 Select [On] or [Off].

Customising Communications Settings


l If you select [On]:
t Press [Option].

9
t Select the <Printing Position> of the Terminal ID information and the <Telephone # Mark> 1 press
[OK] 1 [OK].

Printing the TX Terminal ID 9-23


Printing Position
• [Inside]: The Terminal ID information is printed inside the image area on the recipient's paper.
• [Outside]: The Terminal ID information is printed outside the image area on the recipient's paper.
Telephone # Mark
• [FAX]: FAX is printed before the fax number.
• [TEL]: TEL is printed before the telephone number.
Example: If you set TX Terminal ID to 'On', the Terminal ID information is printed on the
recipient's paper as follows:

Outside 21/04 2003 MON15:00 03 1234 5678

Original
Area
Customising Communications Settings

FAX/TEL

Inside 21/04 2003 MON15:00 03 1234 5678

The selected mode is set.

9-24 Printing the TX Terminal ID


l If you select [Off]:
t Press [OK].

Customising Communications Settings


The selected mode is set.

NOTE
If [On] is selected, the characters for the Terminal ID information may be distorted (vertically stretched) when printed,
depending on the resolution.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

Printing the TX Terminal ID 9-25


Initialising TX Settings
You can restore almost all of the TX settings to their default settings.

IMPORTANT
You cannot initialise the Sender's Names (TTI), Unit Name, and TX Terminal ID settings.

NOTE
If you initialise the TX Settings, the settings stored in the favorites buttons are also initialised.
Customising Communications Settings

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Communications Settings] 1 [TX Settings] under


<Common Settings>.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Automatic Document Deletion," on p. 9-4.

2 [M] until [Initialise TX Settings] appears 1 press [Initialise TX Settings].


[ N] or [M
Press [N

9-26 Initialising TX Settings


3 Press [Yes].

Customising Communications Settings


To cancel initialising the TX Settings, press [No].
The message <Initialised.> appears for approximately two seconds on the touch panel display.

9
The TX settings are initialised.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

Initialising TX Settings 9-27


Two-Sided Printing
You can print received documents on both sides of the paper you select. This enables you to save
paper.

NOTE
The default setting is 'Off'.

1
Customising Communications Settings

Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Communications Settings].

9
2 Press [RX Settings] under <Common Settings>.

9-28 Two-Sided Printing


3 Press [Two-sided Print].

Customising Communications Settings


4 Select [On] or [Off] 1 press [OK].

9
The selected mode is set.

5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

Two-Sided Printing 9-29


Paper Drawer Selection
You can set how the machine prints documents when there is no paper matching the size of the
received document.
There are four printing methods (Switches A, B, C, and D):
• Switch A: The image is printed over two sheets of paper that have the same combined size
as the received document.
Received Data (Original) Output
Customising Communications Settings

A3 A4 A4
• Switch B: The image is printed with blank space on paper that has the same width as the
received document.
Received Data (Original) Output

A4 A3

• Switch C: The image is reduced and printed on paper that differs in width from the received
document.
Received Data (Original) Output

A4R
A3

9-30 Paper Drawer Selection


• Switch D: The image is printed on paper that is larger in size than the received document.
Received Data (Original) Output

A4R
A3

NOTE
• For details on selecting a paper source for printing received documents, see Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the

Customising Communications Settings


Reference Guide.
• The default setting for all switches is 'On'.

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Communications Settings] 1 [RX Settings] under


<Common Settings>.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Two-Sided Printing," on p. 9-28.

2 Press [Select Cassette].

Paper Drawer Selection 9-31


3 Select [On] or [Off] for the respective switches 1 press [OK].
Customising Communications Settings

The selected mode is set.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

9-32 Paper Drawer Selection


Reducing a Received Document
You can set the machine to automatically reduce received documents so that the whole document
is printed within the printable area of the paper.

NOTE
The default settings are:
- Receive Reduction: On
- RX Reduction: Auto
- Reduce %: 90%
- Reduce Direction: Vertical Only

Customising Communications Settings


1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Communications Settings] 1 [RX Settings] under
<Common Settings>.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Two-Sided Printing," on p. 9-28.

2 Press [Receive Reduction].

Reducing a Received Document 9-33


3 Select [On] or [Off].
Customising Communications Settings

IMPORTANT
If you select [Off], the received document is not automatically reduced to fit the size of the paper. If the size of the
received document exceeds the printable area, the image is divided into equal sections and printed onto separate sheets
of paper. However, if the received document exceeds the recording paper slightly
(12 mm or less), the part of the image that does not fit on the paper is not printed.

l If you select [On]:


t Select [Auto] or [Fixed Reduction].

[Auto]: The image is automatically reduced by a suitable reduction ratio that can range
from the value set in the Reduce % drop-down list up to 100% of the size of the
received document.
[Fixed Reduction]: The image is reduced by the reduction ratio set in the Reduce % drop-down
list.

9-34 Reducing a Received Document


t Press the Reduce % drop-down list 1 select [97%], [95%], [90%], or [75%].

Customising Communications Settings


t Select [Vertical & Horizontal] or [Vertical Only] 1 press [OK].

[Vertical & Horizontal]: The image is reduced in both the vertical and horizontal directions.
[Vertical Only]: The image is reduced in the vertical direction only. 9
The selected mode is set.

Reducing a Received Document 9-35


l If you select [Off]:
t Press [OK].
Customising Communications Settings

The selected mode is set.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

9-36 Reducing a Received Document


Printing Footer Information on a Received
Document
You can set whether the machine prints the date received, day received, time received, transaction
number, and page number at the bottom of the received document.

Customising Communications Settings


21/04 2003 MON 11:20 JOB NO. 5010 001

Page Number
Transaction Number
Time Received
Day Received
Date Received

NOTE
The default setting is 'Off'.

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Communications Settings] 1 [RX Settings] under


<Common Settings>.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Two-Sided Printing," on p. 9-28.
9

Printing Footer Information on a Received Document 9-37


2 Press [Received Page Footer].
Customising Communications Settings

3 Select [On] or [Off] 1 press [OK].

9
The selected mode is set.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

9-38 Printing Footer Information on a Received Document


2 On 1 Log
This mode enables you to print two received documents of the same paper size onto a single sheet
of paper.
The 2 On 1 Log mode is available only under the following conditions:
• The same paper drawer must be selected for printing two consecutive pages of the received
document.
• The paper in the selected paper drawer must be large enough for two consecutive pages to be

Customising Communications Settings


printed.
Example: If the A4 drawer is empty, but the A3 drawer is loaded with paper, you can print two
A4 documents onto a single sheet of A3 paper.

NOTE
• When the 2 On 1 Log mode is set to 'On', documents are printed with a broken line in the middle. If the document is
received with sender information included, the dotted line is not printed on the area where the sender information is
located.
• The default setting is 'Off'.

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Communications Settings] 1 [RX Settings] under


<Common Settings>.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Two-Sided Printing," on p. 9-28.

2 Press [2 On 1 Log].
9

2 On 1 Log 9-39
3 Select [On] or [Off] 1 press [OK].
Customising Communications Settings

The selected mode is set.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

9-40 2 On 1 Log
User, TX, and RX Fax Settings
You can register and edit the initial settings of User, TX and RX Settings under Fax Settings
according to your needs.

Adjusting the Alarm and Monitor Volume


You can set the volume for the alarm and monitor tones that this machine emits during a fax
transmission.

Customising Communications Settings


NOTE
• The alarm tone sounds when a fax transmission is completed successfully or when a transmission error occurs.
• The monitor tone sounds when it connects to the recipient's fax machine.
• The default settings for both the Alarm Volume and Monitor Volume are in the middle (5), on a scale of 1 to 9.

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Communications Settings].

User, TX, and RX Fax Settings 9-41


2 Press [User Settings].
Customising Communications Settings

3 Press [Volume Control].

9
4 Select [ ] or [ ] to set the Alarm Volume and Monitor Volume 1 press [OK].

9-42 User, TX, and RX Fax Settings


You can set the volume to any level on a scale of 1 to 9.
If you set the volume to the extreme left, the volume is muted and no tone will be emitted.
The selected mode is set.

5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

ECM Transmission
ECM (Error Correction Mode) reduces the effect of system and line errors on documents that occur
during sending or receiving with another fax unit that supports ECM. If the other fax does not
support ECM, this setting is ignored. If transmission speed appears to be extremely slow, you may
be able to speed up transmission time by turning ECM 'Off'.

Customising Communications Settings


IMPORTANT
• If you want to communicate using ECM, it is necessary that the ECM function is set in both the destination machine
and this machine. This function does not operate unless ECM is set in both machines.
• Even when ECM is set, errors can sometimes occur due to a poor telephone connection.
• If there is trouble with the line, it will take more time for the documents to be sent.

NOTE
• The default setting is 'On'.

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Communications Settings].

User, TX, and RX Fax Settings 9-43


2 Press [TX Settings] under <Fax Settings>.
Customising Communications Settings

3 Press [ECM TX].

9
4 Select [On] or [Off] 1 press [OK].

The selected mode is set.

9-44 User, TX, and RX Fax Settings


5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

Pause Time
Some overseas dialling may not be successful due to the distance or complex routing of
connections when dialling the international access code, country code, and the destination number
all together. In such cases, insert a pause after the international access code. The machine then
dials the number with a short waiting time where the pause has been inserted, which helps to
improve the connection.

NOTE
• You can insert a pause on the screen where you specify the fax number. (See "Specifying a Fax Number," on p. 2-6.)
• Pauses entered at the end of dialled fax numbers are always 10 seconds long.
• The default setting is '4' seconds.

Customising Communications Settings


1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Communications Settings] 1 [TX Settings] under
<Fax Settings>.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "ECM Transmission," on p. 9-43.

2 Press [Pause Time].

User, TX, and RX Fax Settings 9-45


3 Press [-] or [+] to set the pause time 1 press [OK].
Customising Communications Settings

The pause time must be from 1 to 15 seconds, in one second increments.


You can also use - (numeric keys) to enter values.
You can change the value by pressing [-] or [+], even if you have entered the value using -
(numeric keys).
The selected mode is set.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

Auto Redial
Auto Redial is a mode that automatically dials the recipient's fax number again if the recipient
cannot be dialled due to a busy line, or if a sending error occurs.
Auto Redial can be turned 'On' or 'Off'. If you set Auto Redial to 'On', you can set how many times
9 the machine redials, the redial interval, and transmission error redial.

NOTE
• The default settings are:
- Auto Redial: On
- Redial Times: 2 times
- Redial Interval: 2 minutes
- Transmission Error Redial: Error and 1st page

9-46 User, TX, and RX Fax Settings


1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Communications Settings] 1 [TX Settings] under
<Fax Settings>.
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "ECM Transmission," on p. 9-43.

2 Press [Auto Redial].

Customising Communications Settings


3 Select [On] or [Off].

User, TX, and RX Fax Settings 9-47


l If you select [On]:
t Press [Option].
Customising Communications Settings

t Press [-] or [+] to set the number of redial times.

9 The machine can redial from 1 to 10 times.


t Press [-] or [+] to set the redial interval.

The redial interval must be from 2 to 99 minutes in one minute increments.

9-48 User, TX, and RX Fax Settings


t Press the TX Error Resend drop-down list 1 select how the machine should handle a transmission
error 1 press [OK] 1 [OK].

Customising Communications Settings


[Error and 1st page]: Auto Redial takes place if a sending error occurs. The first page of the
document, the error page, and all subsequent pages are resent.
[All pages]: Auto Redial takes place if a sending error occurs. All pages of the document
are resent.
[Off]: Redialing does not take place if a sending error occurs.
The selected mode is set.

l If you select [Off]:


t Press [OK].

The selected mode is set.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

User, TX, and RX Fax Settings 9-49


ECM Reception
You can receive incoming documents using the Error Correction Mode (ECM).
ECM is a function which automatically corrects errors in an image while it is being received.

IMPORTANT
• If you want to transmit using ECM, it is necessary that ECM function is set in both the sending machine and this
machine. This function does not operate unless ECM is set in both machines.
• Even when ECM is set, errors can sometimes occur due to a poor telephone connection.
• If there is trouble with the line, it does take more time for the documents to be received.

NOTE
• The default setting is 'On'.
Customising Communications Settings

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Communications Settings].

9-50 User, TX, and RX Fax Settings


2 Press [RX Settings] under <Fax Settings>.

Customising Communications Settings


3 Press [ECM RX].

9
4 Select [On] or [Off] 1 press [OK].

The selected mode is set.

User, TX, and RX Fax Settings 9-51


5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.
Customising Communications Settings

9-52 User, TX, and RX Fax Settings


Storing/Editing Address Book
Settings
This chapter describes how to register various addresses in the Address Book, and how to edit and
10 CHAPTER

erase registered information.

Address Book Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2


About the Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Registering New Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Fax Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Group Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Addresses Obtained via a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Editing Address Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Erasing Addresses.
Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Naming an Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Registering/Editing One-Touch Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Erasing One-Touch Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

10-1
Address Book Settings Table
The following items can be stored or set in Address Book Settings, from the Additional Functions
screen.

Applicable
Item Settings
Page
Register New Address
Register Address Edit p. 10-4
Erase
Register Address Book Name Register Name p. 10-43
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

One-touch Buttons Register/Edit, Erase p. 10-45

NOTE
For instructions on how to set the modes not described in this manual, refer to the other manuals listed in the front of this
Facsimile Guide. (See "Manuals for the Machine," on p. ii.)

10

10-2 Address Book Settings Table


About the Address Book
The Address Book is a feature used for registering the destinations. The Address Book is divided
into 10 subaddress books, and one-touch buttons. You can register up to 1,800 destinations,
including 1,600 destinations in the subaddress books and 200 destinations in the one-touch
buttons. Registering a destination in the Address Book saves you the effort of entering that
destination's address each time you send a job.
The following types of destinations can be registered in the Address Book.

NOTE
• Since each fax number entry is treated as a single entry, if a fax number is registered in a group address, that fax
number and group address are counted as two entries.
• If the optional Colour Universal Send Kit is installed, e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, and file server addresses can

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


also be registered in the Address Book. For instructions on how to register these types of addresses, see Chapter 9,
"Storing/Editing Address Book Settings," in the Sending Guide.

n Fax
You can register fax numbers, as well as subaddress, password information, and R-key.
A fax number obtained by searching through the directory listing (LDAP) on the network can
also be registered.

n Group
You can register multiple destinations of various types in the group address. You can group and
use these registered destinations according to your needs.

NOTE
• You cannot register the destinations in a group address if those destinations are not registered in the Address Book.
You need to register destinations that you want to register in a group address beforehand.
• When setting a group address, you can select and register only destinations registered in the same subaddress book.

10

About the Address Book 10-3


Registering New Addresses
If you register a destination in the Address Book, you can save yourself the effort of entering the
destination every time it is used. That destination can also be selected from the Address Book for
use in any other customised setting.

NOTE
If the optional Colour Universal Send Kit is installed, e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, and file server addresses can
also be registered in the Address Book. For instructions on how to register these types of addresses, see Chapter 9,
"Storing/Editing Address Book Settings," in the Sending Guide.

Fax Numbers
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Address Book Settings].

If a password has already been set for the Address Book, enter the password using - (numeric
10 keys) 1 press [OK]. (See "Address Book Password," on p. 11-22.)

10-4 Registering New Addresses


2 Press [Register Address].

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


Press [Register New Address].

4 Press [Fax].
10

Registering New Addresses 10-5


5 Press [Name].

6
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

Enter a name for the fax number 1 press [OK].

You can enter up to 24 characters for the name.

10 NOTE
• For instructions on how to enter characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the Reference Guide.
• The first character that you enter for the address name will be used for sorting the addresses when you press keys,
such as [ABC], [DEF], and [GHI], on the Search Address Book/Server screen.

10-6 Registering New Addresses


7 Press the Address Book drop-down list 1 select one of the numbered subaddress
books.

Address Books 1 to 10 are used to divide the Address Book into 10 parts, called subaddress books. This

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


is a convenient way to classify destinations.
The fax number is registered in the subaddress book selected here.

8 Enter the fax number using - (numeric keys), , and .

10

[Pause]: Press to insert a pause of several seconds in the fax number that you
are dialling. If you insert a pause, the letter <p> is displayed between
the numbers, and the letter <P> appears at the end of the number.
When dialling an overseas number, insert a pause after the country
code, and also at the end of the fax number. (See "Pause Time," on
p. 9-45.)
[Tone]: Press when directly calling an extension line connected to a Private
Branch Exchange (PBX) that accepts only tone signals from a dial line.
(See "Fax Information Services," on p. 7-9.)

Registering New Addresses 10-7


[O] [P]: Press to move the position of the cursor.
[Backspace]: Press when a wrong number is entered. The number immediately to the
left of the cursor is deleted, enabling you to enter the correct number.
[Space]: Press to insert a space between numbers.
[+]: Use to insert a country code. Press [+] after the country code, and
before the fax number.
[R]: Press to use the R-key. (See "Special Dialling," on p. 7-5.)
[Option]: Press to specify the subaddress, password, ECM TX, sending speed,
and type of call settings. These settings are optional.

IMPORTANT
You cannot insert a pause or a space at the beginning of a number.

NOTE
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

• You can enter up to 120 characters for the fax number.


• If you enter a pause at the end of a number, the pause is always 10 seconds long.
• You can press (Clear) to clear your entry.

l If you press [Option]:


t Press [Subaddress] 1 enter the recipient's subaddress using - (numeric keys), , and .
t Press [Password] 1 enter the recipient's password using - (numeric keys), , and .

10

You can enter up to 20 digits each for the subaddress and password.
Press [Space] to insert a space.
Press [Backspace] to delete the last digit that you entered.
If the recipient did not set a password for the target subaddress, you do not need to enter a password.

10-8 Registering New Addresses


IMPORTANT
If you attach a subaddress to your send job, make sure that the recipient's fax machine is compatible to ITU-T
(International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector) standard subaddress features.

NOTE
You can press (Clear) to clear your entry.
t Select [On] or [Off] for <ECM TX>.

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


t Press the Sending Speed drop-down list 1 select the desired sending speed.

10
NOTE
If your document transmissions are slow in starting, this may mean that the telephone lines in your area are in poor
condition. Select a slower speed. You can select [33600 bps], [14400 bps], [9600 bps], or [4800 bps].

Registering New Addresses 10-9


t Press the Long Distance drop-down list 1 select the type of call 1 press [OK].

Select [Long Distance (1)] if transmission errors frequently occur when you make overseas calls
(when you are registering an international fax number). If errors persist, try selecting [Long Distance
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

(2)] or [Long Distance (3)].

9 Finish registering the address.

l If Access Number Management is set to 'On':


t Press [Next].

10

10-10 Registering New Addresses


t Enter the access number using - (numeric keys) 1 press [OK].

The access number can be the number of an existing private address book, or you can assign access
numbers to individual addresses within the address book.

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


If you do not want to set an access number for that fax number, press [OK] without entering any
number.
You can store up to seven digits for the access number. If you enter fewer than seven digits, the
machine stores the access number with leading zeros.
Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
You cannot store an access number with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>.
The display returns to the Register New Address screen.

l If Access Number Management is set to 'Off':


t Press [OK].

10

The display returns to the Register New Address screen.

Registering New Addresses 10-11


NOTE
• To use Access Number Management, press (Additional Functions) 1 [System Settings] 1 [Manage/Access to
Address Book] 1 [Access Number Management] 1 [On]. (See "Access Number Management," on p. 11-24.)
• If Access Number Management is set to 'On' and the required parameters have not been entered, a screen for
specifying the missing parameters is displayed.

10 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

Group Addresses
The Group Address feature enables you to create a group of up to 256 registered destinations as a
single destination.

IMPORTANT
If you want to register a group address, the destinations must be registered beforehand.
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

NOTE
• If you want to register a group address, you can only select destinations registered in the same subaddress book.
• If the optional Colour Universal Send Kit is installed, e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, and file server addresses can
also be registered in a group address along with fax numbers. For instructions on how to register these types of
addresses, see Chapter 9, "Storing/Editing Address Book Settings," in the Sending Guide.

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Address Book Settings] 1 [Register Address].


If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Fax Numbers," on p. 10-4.
If a password has already been set for the Address Book, enter the password using - (numeric
keys) 1 press [OK]. (See "Address Book Password," on p. 11-22.)

10

10-12 Registering New Addresses


2 Press [Register New Address].

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


Press [Group].

4 Press [Name].
10

Registering New Addresses 10-13


5 Enter a name for the group address 1 press [OK].

You can enter up to 24 characters for the name.


Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

NOTE
• For instructions on how to enter characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the Reference Guide.
• The first character that you enter for the address name will be used for sorting the addresses when you press keys,
such as [ABC], [DEF], and [GHI], on the Search Address Book/Server screen.

6 Press the Address Book drop-down list 1 select one of the numbered subaddress
books.

10

Address Books 1 to 10 are used to divide the Address Book into 10 parts, called subaddress books. This
is a convenient way to classify destinations.
The group address that you enter will be registered in the subaddress book selected here.

10-14 Registering New Addresses


7 Select [Address Book] or [Store In Usr Inbox].

To register destinations in a group address, those destinations must be registered in the subaddress
book that contains the group address.

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


You cannot register destinations from different subaddress books. For example, you cannot register a fax
number from Address Book 1 and a fax number from Address Book 2 into the same group address.

l If you select [Address Book]:


t Select the destinations to be stored from the Address Book.
If Access Number Management is set to 'On', and you want to select a destination that is stored with
an access number or in a private address book:
• Press [Access Number].

10

Registering New Addresses 10-15


• Enter the access number for the private address book or destination using - (numeric keys)
1 press [OK].

If you press [No Access Number], the destinations that are not managed with the Access Number
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

setting are displayed.


If you press [Cancel], the display returns to the screen that was displayed before pressing [Access
Number].

• Select the destination 1 press [OK].

10

10-16 Registering New Addresses


If Access Number Management is set to 'Off', or the destination is not stored with an access number or
in a private address book:
• Select the destination 1 press [OK].

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark.
Press the alphabet keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the range of entries. Press the same key again to
return to the full address list.
If the destination to be selected is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the destination.
You can select a destination and press [Details] to display the screen shown below. This enables you
to confirm the detailed information related to the selected destinations. Press [Done] to return to the
previous screen.

10

Repeat step 7 to add other destinations.


The destination you have registered is listed.

Registering New Addresses 10-17


NOTE
To display [Access Number], set Access Number Management to 'On'. To access Access Number Management, press
(Additional Functions) 1 [System Settings] 1 [Manage/Access to Address Book] 1 [Access Number
Management]. (See "Access Number Management," on p. 11-24.)

l If you select [Store In Usr Inbox]:


t Select the User Inbox to store the document from the Inbox Selection screen 1 press [OK].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

User Inboxes specified as destinations correspond to the inboxes specified on the Inbox Selection
screen for the Mail Box function.
If the desired User Inbox is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the desired User Inbox.
The stored User Inbox is displayed.

10

NOTE
Only one User Inbox can be stored into one group address.

10-18 Registering New Addresses


l To erase a destination:
t Select an address in the group 1 press [Erase].

If the desired destination is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the desired destination.

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


The selected destination is erased.

8 Finish registering the group address.

l If Access Number Management is set to 'On':


t Press [Next].

10

Registering New Addresses 10-19


t Enter the access number using - (numeric keys) 1 press [OK].

The access number can be the number of an existing private address book, or you can assign access
numbers to individual addresses within the address book.
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

If you do not want to set an access number for that group address, press [OK] without entering any
number.
You can store up to seven digits for the access number. If you enter fewer than seven digits, the
machine stores the access number with leading zeros.
Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
You cannot store an access number with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>.
The display returns to the Register New Address screen.

l If Access Number Management is set to 'Off':


t Press [OK].

10

The display returns to the Register New Address screen.

10-20 Registering New Addresses


NOTE
• To use Access Number Management, press (Additional Functions) 1 [System Settings] 1 [Manage/Access to
Address Book] 1 [Access Number Management] 1 [On]. (See "Access Number Management," on p. 11-24.)
• If Access Number Management is set to 'On' and the required parameters have not been entered, a screen for
specifying the missing parameters is displayed.

9 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

Addresses Obtained via a Server


You can register an address that is obtained by searching through the directory listings using LDAP
(Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) servers on the network.

NOTE
• You may have to set up the LDAP servers beforehand, depending on the network environment.
• For more information on LDAP servers, see "LDAP Server Settings," on p. 11-52.
• Only names and fax numbers can be obtained from the LDAP server.

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


• If the optional Colour Universal Send Kit is installed, you can also register or search for e-mail addresses. (See
Chapter 9, "Storing/Editing Address Book Settings," in the Sending Guide.)

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Address Book Settings] 1 [Register Address].


If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Fax Numbers," on p. 10-4.
If a password has already been set for the Address Book, enter the password using - (numeric
keys) 1 press [OK]. (See "Address Book Password," on p. 11-22.)

10

Registering New Addresses 10-21


2 Press [Register New Address].

3
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

Press [Search on Server].

10 4 Press the Server to Search drop-down list 1 select the desired server to search.

10-22 Registering New Addresses


5 Specify the search criteria.

NOTE
• For instructions on how to enter characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the Reference Guide.
• If you want to search a destination that is registered with both an e-mail address and a fax number, you can search the
fax number by entering the e-mail address as the search criterion.

l To use Simple Search:


t Press [Name], [E-mail], or [Fax] 1 enter the name, e-mail address, or fax number for which to search
1 press [OK].

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


You can enter up to 128 characters for the name, e-mail address, or fax number.
You can also use - (numeric keys) to enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your entries.
The search criteria boxes that you do not fill out are not searched.
To make a more detailed search with multiple criteria, press [Detailed Search], and follow the
directions below. The search criteria you entered for Simple Search are continuously used in Detailed
Search.

10

Registering New Addresses 10-23


l To use Detailed Search:
t Press [Detailed Search].

t Press the search category drop-down list 1 select the desired search category.
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

Search Category

The available search categories are:


• [Name]: Search by name.
• [E-mail]: Search by e-mail address.
10 • [Fax]: Search by fax number.
• [Organisation]: Search by organisation name.
• [OrgnztionUnit]: Search by unit (e.g., departments in an organisation).
For example, if cn=user1, ou=salesdept, o=canon, c=jp is the distinguished name in the directory,
enter the organisation/organisationUnit of the user as follows:
organisationUnit=salesdept
organisation=canon

10-24 Registering New Addresses


NOTE
• The organisation/organisationUnit can be used as search categories only if the information has been registered on the
LDAP server.
• Detailed Search by organisation/organisationUnit may not be performed depending on whether the attribute types
have been registered on the LDAP server, and the type of application on the server, such as Windows 2000 Server
with Active Directory.

t Press the search condition drop-down list 1 select the desired search condition 1 press [Settings].

Search Condition

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


The available search conditions are:
• [contains]: The result must contain the entered name, e-mail address, fax number,
organisation, or organisational unit.
• [does not contain]: The result must not contain the entered name, e-mail address, fax number,
organisation, or organisational unit.
• [equals]: The result must be exactly the same as the entered name, e-mail address, fax
number, organisation, or organisational unit.
• [differs from]: The result must be different from the name, e-mail address, fax number,
organisation, or organisational unit that you entered.
• [begins with]: The result must begin with the same first few letters that you entered for the
name, e-mail address, fax number, organisation, or organisational unit.
• [ends with]: The result must end with the same last few letters that you entered for the
name, e-mail address, fax number, organisation, or organisational unit.

10

Registering New Addresses 10-25


t Enter the search criteria 1 press [OK].

You can enter up to 128 characters for the search criteria.


You can also use - (numeric keys) to enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your entries.
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

t Press [Add].

To continue adding more search conditions, press [or] or [and] 1 repeat step 5.
10 • [or]: The machine searches and returns a result for either of the specified search criteria.
• [and]: The machine searches and returns a result for all of the specified search criteria.
To edit the search criteria, select the criterion that you want to edit 1 press [Edit] 1 [Settings]. To
delete search criteria, select the criterion that you want to erase 1 press [Erase].

10-26 Registering New Addresses


NOTE
• You can specify up to four different search criteria at a time.
• If you specify three or more search criteria, you cannot use both [or] and [and] together.
• If you press [Simple Search] after specifying search criteria on the Detailed Search screen, the display changes to the
Simple Search screen, and the specified detailed search criteria are deleted.

6 Press [Start Searching].

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


To cancel searching, press [Cancel].
To cancel searching while the machine is searching for your criteria, press [Cancel]. If the machine finds
some results before you press [Cancel], the search results are displayed.

IMPORTANT
The number of search results displayed will not exceed the maximum limit set in Register LDAP Server in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). If the desired destination is not displayed, either increase the maximum
number of addresses to search for or change the search criteria. (See "LDAP Server Settings," on p. 11-52.)

NOTE
If you press [Start Searching] without specifying any search criteria, all the addresses registered on the LDAP server are
displayed.

10

Registering New Addresses 10-27


l If the Enter Network Password screen is displayed:
t Press [User] 1 enter the user name 1 press [OK].

You can enter up to 128 characters for the user name.


Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

The Enter Network Password screen is displayed if either one of the following is true:
• When Login Information in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) is set to 'Use', and <Display authentication dialog when searching> is set to 'On'
• If the user name, password, and/or domain name specified in Register LDAP Server in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is incorrect
t Press [Password] 1 enter the password 1 press [OK].

10

You can enter up to 24 characters for the password.

10-28 Registering New Addresses


NOTE
• For instructions on how to enter characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the Reference Guide.
• You can also use - (numeric keys) to enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your entries.
• After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks (*****) on the Enter Network Password
screen.

t Verify the settings 1 press [OK].

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


The search results are displayed.

7 Select the destination that you want to register in the Address Book from the search
results 1 press [Next].

10

To continue searching, press [Back].


You can specify multiple destinations.
If the desired destination is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the desired destination.

Registering New Addresses 10-29


If you want to select the first 64 addresses, press [Select All (Max 64 destinations)]. (If a destination is
selected, the key changes to [Clear Selection].)
If the optional Colour Universal Send Kit is installed, e-mail addresses that meet the search criteria are
also displayed.
If the optional Colour Universal Send Kit is installed, you can restrict the type of destinations displayed in
the list by pressing the Type drop-down list.
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

Colour Universal Send Kit is installed.

NOTE
To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark.

8 Register the selected destination.

l If only one destination is selected:


t Verify the destination 1 press [OK].

10

If necessary, edit the contents of the destination.


The display returns to the Register New Address screen.

10-30 Registering New Addresses


l If you want to register the address with an access number, and Access Number
Management is set to 'On':
t Press [Next].

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


t Enter the access number using - (numeric keys) 1 press [OK].

The access number can be the number of an existing private address book, or you can assign access
numbers to individual addresses within the address book.
If you do not want to set an access number, press [OK] without entering any number. 10
You can store up to seven digits for the access number. If you enter fewer than seven digits, the
machine stores the access number with leading zeros.
Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
You cannot store an access number with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>.
The display returns to the Register New Address screen.

Registering New Addresses 10-31


NOTE
To use Access Number Management, press (Additional Functions) 1 [System Settings] 1 [Manage/Access to
Address Book] 1 [Access Number Management] 1 [On]. (See "Access Number Management," on p. 11-24.)

l If multiple addresses are selected:


t Select the subaddress book to register the addresses in 1 press [OK].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

If the subaddress book is stored with an access number, and Access Number Management is set to
'On', enter the access number using - (numeric keys) 1 press [OK].

10
The access number can be the number of an existing private address book, or you can assign access
numbers to individual addresses within the address book.
If you do not want to set an access number, press [OK] without entering any number.
You can store up to seven digits for the access number. If you enter fewer than seven digits, the
machine stores the access number with leading zeros.
Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
You cannot store an access number with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>.

10-32 Registering New Addresses


t Verify the displayed messages 1 press [OK].

The display returns to the Register New Address screen.

NOTE

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


The maximum number of addresses that can be selected at one time is 64.

9 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

10

Registering New Addresses 10-33


Editing Address Details
You can change destination details as necessary.

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Address Book Settings] 1 [Register Address].


If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Fax Numbers," on p. 10-4.
If a password has already been set for the Address Book, enter the password using - (numeric
keys) 1 press [OK]. (See "Address Book Password," on p. 11-22.)

2 Select the address to be changed.


Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

l If Access Number Management is set to 'On', and you want to select a destination that is
stored with an access number or in a private address book:
t Press [Access Number].

10

10-34 Editing Address Details


t Enter the access number for the private address book or destination using
- (numeric keys) 1 press [OK].

If you press [No Access Number], the destinations that are not managed with the Access Number

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


setting are displayed.
If you press [Cancel], the display returns to the screen that was displayed before pressing [Access
Number].

t Select the destination to be changed 1 press [Edit].

10

Editing Address Details 10-35


l If Access Number Management is set to 'Off', or the destination is not stored with an
access number or in a private address book:
t Select the destination to be changed 1 press [Edit].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

Press the alphabet keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the range of entries. Press the same key again to return
to the full address list.
If the destination to be selected is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the destination.
You can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the list by pressing the Type drop-down list.
Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books (1 to 10). Subaddress books
categorize the destinations stored in the Address Book.
In the Address Book drop-down list, [One-touch Buttons] is greyed out and cannot be selected.
If you select [All] in the Address Book drop-down list, the destinations registered in the one-touch buttons
are displayed. However, you cannot edit these destinations. For instructions on how to register and edit
one-touch buttons, see "Registering/Editing One-Touch Buttons," on p. 10-45.
The current settings for the selected destination appear.

NOTE
To display [Access Number], set Access Number Management to 'On'. To access Access Number Management, press
(Additional Functions) 1 [System Settings] 1 [Manage/Access to Address Book] 1 [Access Number
Management]. (See "Access Number Management," on p. 11-24.)
10
3 Edit the address details.
The screen differs depending on the address type you select in step 2.
You cannot change the subaddress book of a group address, or change a destination registered as a
group address.

10-36 Editing Address Details


NOTE
• For instructions on setting fax numbers, see "Fax Numbers," on p. 10-4.
• For instructions on setting group addresses, see "Group Addresses," on p. 10-12.

4 Finish editing the destination details.

l If Access Number Management is set to 'On':


t Press [Next].

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


t Enter the access number using - (numeric keys) 1 press [OK].

10

The access number can be the number of an existing private address book, or you can assign access
numbers to individual addresses within the address book.
If you do not want to set an access number for the destination, press [OK] without entering any
number.
You can store up to seven digits for the access number. If you enter fewer than seven digits, the
machine stores the access number with leading zeros.
Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.

Editing Address Details 10-37


You cannot store an access number with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>.
The display returns to the Register Address screen.

l If Access Number Management is set to 'Off':


t Press [OK].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

The display returns to the Register Address screen.

NOTE
• To use Access Number Management, press (Additional Functions) 1 [System Settings] 1 [Manage/Access to
Address Book] 1 [Access Number Management] 1 [On]. (See "Access Number Management," on p. 11-24.)
• If Access Number Management is set to 'On' and the required parameters have not been entered, a screen for
specifying the missing parameters is displayed.

5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

10

10-38 Editing Address Details


Erasing Addresses
You can erase destinations stored in the address book.

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Address Book Settings] 1 [Register Address].


If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Fax Numbers," on p. 10-4.
If a password has already been set for the Address Book, enter the password using - (numeric
keys) 1 press [OK]. (See "Address Book Password," on p. 11-22.)

2 Select the address to erase.

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


l If Access Number Management is set to 'On', and you want to select a destination that is
stored with an access number or in a private address book:
t Press [Access Number].

10

Erasing Addresses 10-39


t Enter the access number for the private address book or destination using - (numeric keys) 1
press [OK].

If you press [No Access Number], the destinations that are not managed with the Access Number
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

setting are displayed.


If you press [Cancel], the display returns to the screen that was displayed before pressing [Access
Number].

t Select the address to erase 1 press [Erase].

10

10-40 Erasing Addresses


l If Access Number Management is set to 'Off', or the destination is not stored with an
access number or in a private address book:
t Select the address to erase 1 press [Erase].

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


You cannot erase multiple destinations at one time.
Press the alphabet keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the range of entries. Press the same key again to return
to the full address list.
If the destination to be selected is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the destination.
You can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the list by pressing the Type drop-down list.
Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books (1 to 10). Subaddress books
categorize the destinations stored in the Address Book.
In the Address Book drop-down list, [One-touch Buttons] is greyed out and cannot be selected.
If you select [All] in the Address Book drop-down list, the destinations stored in the one-touch buttons will
be displayed. However, you cannot erase these destinations. For instructions on how to erase one-touch
buttons, see "Erasing One-Touch Buttons," on p. 10-66.

NOTE
To display [Access Number], set Access Number Management to 'On'. To access Access Number Management, press
(Additional Functions) 1 [System Settings] 1 [Manage/Access to Address Book] 1 [Access Number
Management]. (See "Access Number Management," on p. 11-24.)

10

Erasing Addresses 10-41


3 Press [Yes].

To cancel erasing, press [No].


Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

The message <Erased.> appears for approximately two seconds on the touch panel display.
The selected destination is erased.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

10

10-42 Erasing Addresses


Naming an Address Book
You can assign a name to any subaddress book.

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Address Book Settings] 1 [Register Address Book


Name].

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


If a password has already been set for the Address Book, enter the password using - (numeric
keys) 1 press [OK]. (See "Address Book Password," on p. 11-22.)

2 Select a subaddress book to name 1 press [Register Name].

10

In this example, [Address Book 1] is selected.

Naming an Address Book 10-43


3 Enter a name 1 press [OK].

You can enter up to 16 characters for a name.


Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

NOTE
• For instructions on how to enter characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the Reference Guide.
• If you press [OK] without entering any characters, the subaddress book name reverts to its current name (default
Address Book 1 to 10).

4 Press [OK].

10

5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

10-44 Naming an Address Book


Registering/Editing One-Touch Buttons
You can register up to 200 destinations in the one-touch buttons feature. This section describes
how to register/edit the destinations with the one-touch buttons feature.

IMPORTANT
If Language Switch in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the Host Name and File
Path of the file server destination may not be displayed correctly, so you may not be able to refer to them.

NOTE
• Destinations registered in one-touch buttons are also displayed in the Address Book.
• A new address cannot be registered as part of a group address for a one-touch button. The address must first be
registered as an individual one-touch button address before you can select it for inclusion in a group address.
• If the optional Colour Universal Send Kit is installed, e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, and file server addresses can

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


also be registered in one-touch buttons. For instructions on how to register these types of addresses, see Chapter 9,
"Storing/Editing Address Book Settings," in the Sending Guide.
• For instructions on how to enter characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the Reference Guide.

10

Registering/Editing One-Touch Buttons 10-45


1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Address Book Settings] 1 [One-touch Buttons].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

If a password has already been set for the Address Book, enter the password using - (numeric
keys) 1 press [OK]. (See "Address Book Password," on p. 11-22.)

2 Select a one-touch button to register or edit 1 press [Register/Edit].

10
If the one-touch button to be selected is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the one-touch button.

10-46 Registering/Editing One-Touch Buttons


If you want to select a one-touch button using - (numeric keys), press [ ] (one-touch button
number) 1 enter the three digit number of the desired one-touch button.

One-touch Button Number

If you select a one-touch button already storing a destination, proceed to step 4 and edit the contents if
necessary.

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


NOTE
• One-touch buttons that already have destinations stored in them are displayed with a coloured triangle ( ) in the
lower right corner of the key.
• If you select a one-touch button that already has destinations registered in it, the destinations are displayed.
• If you register multiple destinations using group address, the number of registered destinations is displayed.

10

Registering/Editing One-Touch Buttons 10-47


3 Select [Fax], [Group], or [Search on Server].

l If you select [Fax]:


Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

t Press [Name].

t Enter a name for the fax number 1 press [OK].

10

You can enter up to 24 characters for the name.

10-48 Registering/Editing One-Touch Buttons


NOTE
The first character that you enter for the address name will be used for sorting the addresses when you press keys, such
as [ABC], [DEF], and [GHI], on the Search Address Book/Server screen.

t Press [One-touch Button Name].

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


t Enter a name for the one-touch button 1 press [OK].

You can enter up to 12 characters for the one-touch button name. 10


If you press [Shift], the entry mode changes to the upper case mode, in which upper case characters
and some symbols (e.g., @) can be entered.

Registering/Editing One-Touch Buttons 10-49


t Enter the fax number of the destination using - (numeric keys), , and .

[Pause]: Press to insert a pause of several seconds in the fax number that
you are dialling. If you insert a pause, the letter <p> is displayed
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

between the numbers, and the letter <P> appears at the end of the
number. When dialling an overseas number, insert a pause after the
country code, and also at the end of the fax number. (See "Pause
Time," on p. 9-45.)
[Tone]: Press when directly calling an extension line connected to a Private
Branch Exchange (PBX) that accepts only tone signals from a dial
line. (See "Fax Information Services," on p. 7-9.)
[O] [P]: Press to move the position of the cursor.
[Backspace]: Press when a wrong number is entered. The number immediately to
the left of the cursor is deleted, enabling you to enter the correct
number.
[Space]: Press to insert a space between numbers.
[+]: Use to insert a country code. Press [+] after the country code, and
before the fax number.
10 [R]: Press to use the R-key. (See "Special Dialling," on p. 7-5.)
[Option]: Press to specify the subaddress, password, ECM TX, sending
speed, and type of call settings. These settings are optional.

IMPORTANT
You cannot insert a pause or a space at the beginning of a number.

10-50 Registering/Editing One-Touch Buttons


NOTE
• You can enter up to 120 characters for the fax number.
• If you enter a pause at the end of a number, the pause is always 10 seconds long.
• You can press (Clear) to clear your entry.
t If you press [Option], press [Subaddress] 1 enter the recipient's subaddress using - (numeric
keys), , and .
t Press [Password] 1 enter the recipient's password using - (numeric keys), , and .

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


You can enter up to 20 digits each for the subaddress and password.
Press [Space] to insert a space.
Press [Backspace] to delete the last digit that you entered.
If the recipient did not set a password for the target subaddress, you do not need to enter a password.

IMPORTANT
If you attach a subaddress to your send job, make sure that the recipient's fax machine is compatible to ITU-T
(International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector) standard subaddress features.

NOTE
You can press (Clear) to clear your entry.

10

Registering/Editing One-Touch Buttons 10-51


t Select [On] or [Off] for <ECM TX>.

t Press the Sending Speed drop-down list 1 select the desired sending speed.
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

NOTE
If your document transmissions are slow in starting, this may mean that the telephone lines in your area are in poor
condition. Select a slower speed. You can select [33600 bps], [14400 bps], [9600 bps], or [4800 bps].

10

10-52 Registering/Editing One-Touch Buttons


t Press the Long Distance drop-down list 1 select the type of call 1 press [OK].

Select [Long Distance (1)] if transmission errors frequently occur when you make overseas calls
(when you are registering an international fax number). If errors persist, try selecting [Long Distance

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


(2)] or [Long Distance (3)].

l If you select [Group]:


t Press [Name].

10

Registering/Editing One-Touch Buttons 10-53


t Enter a name for the group address 1 press [OK].

You can enter up to 24 characters for the name.

NOTE
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

The first character that you enter for the address name will be used for sorting the addresses when you press keys, such
as [ABC], [DEF], and [GHI], on the Search Address Book/Server screen.
t Press [One-touch Button Name].

10

10-54 Registering/Editing One-Touch Buttons


t Enter a name for the one-touch button 1 press [OK].

You can enter up to 12 characters for the name.

t Press [Specifying Destinations].

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


t Select a destination to store in the group address from [Address Book], one-touch buttons, or [Store In
Usr Inbox] 1 press [OK].
10

Only addresses that are already registered in one-touch buttons can be selected as part of a
one-touch button group address.

Registering/Editing One-Touch Buttons 10-55


If you want to select a one-touch button using - (numeric keys), press [ ] (one-touch button
number) 1 enter the three digit number of the desired one-touch button.

l If you select [Search on Server]:


Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

t Press the Server to Search drop-down list 1 select the desired server to search.

10

10-56 Registering/Editing One-Touch Buttons


t Specify the search criteria.
To use Simple Search:
• Press [Name], [E-mail], or [Fax] 1 enter the name, e-mail address, or fax number for which to
search 1 press [OK].

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


You can enter up to 128 characters for the name, e-mail address, or fax number.
You can also use - (numeric keys) to enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your entries.
The search criteria boxes that you do not fill out are not searched.
To make a more detailed search with multiple criteria, press [Detailed Search], and follow the
directions below. The search criteria you entered for Simple Search are continuously used in Detailed
Search.

To use Detailed Search:


• Press [Detailed Search].

10

Registering/Editing One-Touch Buttons 10-57


• Press the search category drop-down list 1 select the desired search category.

Search Category

The available search categories are:


- [Name]: Search by name.
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

- [E-mail] Search by e-mail address.


- [Fax]: Search by fax number.
- [Organisation]: Search by organisation name.
- [OrgnztionUnit]: Search by unit (e.g., departments in an organisation).
For example, if cn=user1, ou=salesdept, o=canon, c=jp is the distinguished name in the directory,
enter the organisation/organisationUnit of the user as follows:
organisationUnit=salesdept
organisation=canon

• Press the search condition drop-down list 1 select the desired search condition 1 press [Settings].

Search Condition

10

The available search conditions are:


- [contains]: The result must contain the entered name, e-mail address, fax number,
organisation, or organisational unit.

10-58 Registering/Editing One-Touch Buttons


- [does not contain]: The result must not contain the entered name, e-mail address, fax number,
organisation, or organisational unit.
- [equals]: The result must be exactly the same as the entered name, e-mail address, fax
number, organisation, or organisational unit.
- [differs from]: The result must be different from the name, e-mail address, fax number,
organisation, or organisational unit that you entered.
- [begins with]: The result must begin with the same first few letters that you entered for the
name, e-mail address, fax number, organisation, or organisational unit.
- [ends with]: The result must end with the same last few letters that you entered for the
name, e-mail address, fax number, organisation, or organisational unit.

• Enter the search criteria 1 press [OK].

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


You can enter up to 128 characters for the search criteria.
You can also use - (numeric keys) to enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your entries.

10

Registering/Editing One-Touch Buttons 10-59


• Press [Add].

To continue adding more search criteria, press [or] or [and] 1 repeat the "Specify the search criteria"
step on p. 10-57.
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

- [or]: The machine searches and returns a result for either of the specified search criteria.
- [and]: The machine searches and returns a result for all of the specified search criteria.
To edit the search criteria, select the criterion that you want to edit 1 press [Edit] 1 [Settings]. To
delete search criteria, select the criterion that you want to erase 1 press [Erase].

NOTE
• You can specify up to four different search criteria at a time.
• If you specify three or more search criteria, you cannot use both [or] and [and] together.
• If you press [Simple Search] after specifying search criteria on the Detailed Search screen, the display changes to the
Simple Search screen and the specified detailed search criteria are deleted.
• Only names and fax numbers can be obtained from the LDAP server.
• If you want to search a destination that is registered with an e-mail address and a fax number, you can search the fax
number by entering the e-mail address as the search criterion.
• The organisation/organisationUnit can be used as search categories only if the information has been registered on the
LDAP server.
• Detailed Search by organisation/organisationUnit may not be performed depending on whether the attribute types
have been registered on the LDAP server, and the type of application on the server, such as Windows 2000 Server
with Active Directory.

10

10-60 Registering/Editing One-Touch Buttons


t Press [Start Searching].

To cancel searching, press [Cancel].


To cancel searching while the machine is searching for your criteria, press [Cancel]. If the machine

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


finds some results before you press [Cancel], the search results are displayed.
If the Enter Network Password screen is displayed:
• Press [User] 1 enter the user name 1 press [OK].

You can enter up to 128 characters for the user name. 10


The Enter Network Password screen is displayed if either one of the following is true:
- When Login Information in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) is set to 'Use', and <Display authentication dialog when searching> is set to 'On'
- If the user name, password, and/or domain name specified in Register LDAP Server in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is incorrect

Registering/Editing One-Touch Buttons 10-61


• Press [Password] 1 enter the password 1 press [OK].

You can enter up to 24 characters for the password.


Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

• Verify the settings 1 press [OK].

The search results are displayed.

10 IMPORTANT
The number of search results displayed will not exceed the maximum limit set in Register LDAP Server in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). If the desired destination is not displayed, either increase the maximum
number of addresses to search for or change the search criteria. (See "LDAP Server Settings," on p. 11-52.)

10-62 Registering/Editing One-Touch Buttons


NOTE
• If you press [Start Searching] without specifying any search criteria, all the addresses stored on the LDAP server are
displayed.
• For instructions on how to enter characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the Reference Guide.
• You can also use - (numeric keys) to enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your entries.
• After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks (*****) on the Enter Network Password
screen.

t Select the destination that you want to register in the one-touch button from the search results 1 press
[Next].

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


To continue searching, press [Back].
You cannot specify multiple destinations.
If the destination to be selected is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the destination.
If the optional Colour Universal Send Kit is installed, e-mail addresses that meet the search criteria are
also displayed.
If the optional Colour Universal Send Kit is installed, you can restrict the type of destinations displayed
in the list by pressing the Type drop-down list.

10

Colour Universal Send Kit is installed.

Registering/Editing One-Touch Buttons 10-63


NOTE
To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.

t Verify the address.


Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

If necessary, edit the contents of the address.


t Press [One-touch Button Name] 1 enter a name for the one-touch button 1 press [OK].

10 You can enter up to 12 characters for the one-touch button name.

10-64 Registering/Editing One-Touch Buttons


4 Press [OK].

The contents you have registered appear on the display.

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

10

Registering/Editing One-Touch Buttons 10-65


Erasing One-Touch Buttons
You can erase the destinations that you have registered in the one-touch buttons.

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Address Book Settings] 1 [One-touch Buttons].


If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Registering/Editing One-Touch Buttons," on p. 10-45.
If a password has already been set for the Address Book, enter the password using - (numeric
keys) 1 press [OK]. (See "Address Book Password," on p. 11-22.)

2 Select the one-touch button with the destination(s) that you want to erase 1 press
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

[Erase].

If the desired button is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the desired button.

10

10-66 Erasing One-Touch Buttons


If you want to select a one-touch button using - (numeric keys), press [ ] (one-touch button
number) 1 enter the three digit number of the desired one-touch button.

IMPORTANT

Storing/Editing Address Book Settings


Make sure to verify the settings first before erasing them.

NOTE
• One-touch buttons that already have destinations stored in them are displayed with a coloured triangle ( ) in the
lower right corner of the key.
• If you select a one-touch button that already has destinations registered in it, the destinations are displayed.
• If you register multiple destinations using group address, the number of registered destinations is displayed.

3 Press [Yes].

10

To cancel erasing, press [No].


The message <Erased.> appears for approximately two seconds on the touch panel display.

Erasing One-Touch Buttons 10-67


The destinations registered in the selected one-touch button are erased.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings

10

10-68 Erasing One-Touch Buttons


System Manager Settings
This chapter describes the settings that can be made by the System Manager (the person in charge of
11 CHAPTER

the machine).

System Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2


Communications Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Memory RX Inbox Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Manage/Access to Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
Address Book Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
Access Number Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
Forwarding Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
Storing Forwarding Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27
When Forwarding Destinations Do Not Match the Forwarding Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-40
Checking/Changing Forwarding Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-46
Forwarding Received Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-48
Erasing Forwarding Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-49
Printing Forwarding Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-50
LDAP Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-52
Registering an LDAP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-52
Changing an LDAP Server Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-67
Erasing an LDAP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-69
Printing LDAP Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-70

11-1
System Settings Table
The following items can be stored and changed in System Settings from the Additional Functions
screen.

n System Settings

Applicable
Item Settings
Page
Communications Settings
Fax Settings
33600 bps*, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, 7200
Send Start Speed
bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps
33600 bps*, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, 7200 p. 11-3
Receive Start Speed
bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps
Receive Password 20 digits maximum
R-key Setting PSTN*, PBX
Memory RX Inbox Settings
System Manager Settings

Memory RX Inbox
Seven digits maximum p. 11-10
Password
Use Fax Memory Lock On, Off* p. 11-12
Memory Lock Start Time Everyday, Select Days, Off* p. 11-13
Memory Lock End Time Everyday, Select Days, Off* p. 11-17
Manage/Access to Address
Book
Address Book Password Seven digits maximum p. 11-21
11 Access Number
On, Off* p. 11-23
Management
Validate/Invalidate, Register, Forward w/o
Forwarding Settings p. 11-25
Conditions, Edit, Erase, Print List
Register LDAP Server Register, Edit, Erase, Print List p. 11-51

An asterisk (*) indicates the default settings.

11-2 System Settings Table


NOTE
For instructions on how to set the modes or settings not described in this manual, refer to the other manuals listed in the
front of this Facsimile Guide. (See "Manuals for the Machine," on p. ii.)

System Manager Settings


11

System Settings Table 11-3


Communications Settings
This section describes the fax and Memory RX Inbox settings.

Fax Settings
This section describes settings that the System Manager can make, including how to set the Send
Start Speed, Receive Start Speed, RX (Receive) mode, and register a password.

n Send/Receive Start Speed


This function enables you to change the send and receive start speeds, which is useful when
there is difficulty initiating the sending or receiving of a document.

n Reception Password
This function enables you to set an optional ITU-T standard password. If a subaddress is not set
in a document that was received from another party using the ITU-T standard, an RX password
check takes place. If the RX password found does not match the RX password set with this
mode, or if an RX password is not attached to the document, the document is not received.

n R-key Setting
If your machine is connected through a PBX (Private Branch Exchange), it is necessary to set
System Manager Settings

the access method. You can set the PBX type to [Prefix], [Hooking], or [Earth Connection].

NOTE
• ITU-T stands for International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector, and is the
group that makes recommendations towards the standardization of worldwide telecommunications.
• If you select [Prefix] of R-key Setting, you can set a code of up to 20 digits that will access an outside line. Be sure to
enter a pause (P) after the prefix code.
• The default settings are:
- Send Start Speed: 33600 bps
- Receive Start Speed: 33600 bps
- Receive Password: (No setting)
- R-key Setting: PSTN

11

11-4 Communications Settings


1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [System Settings].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have already been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) 1 press (ID).

2 Press [Communications Settings].

System Manager Settings


NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the desired setting.
11

Communications Settings 11-5


3 Press [Fax Settings].

4 Press the Send Start Speed drop-down list 1 select the desired start speed.
System Manager Settings

NOTE
If your document transmissions are slow in starting, this may mean that the telephone lines in your area are in poor
condition. Select a slower speed. You can select [33600 bps], [14400 bps], [9600 bps], or [4800 bps].

11

11-6 Communications Settings


5 Press the Receive Start Speed drop-down list 1 select the desired start speed.

NOTE
If your document transmissions are slow in starting, this may mean that the telephone lines in your area are in poor
condition. Select a slower speed. You can select [33600 bps], [14400 bps], [9600 bps], or [4800 bps].

6 Enter the receive password using - (numeric keys), , and .

System Manager Settings


You can enter up to 20 digits for the receive password.
Press [Space] to insert a space. 11
Press [Backspace] to delete the last digit that you entered.

IMPORTANT
Priority is given to a subaddress password if the received document is set with a subaddress, even if a receive password
is set.

Communications Settings 11-7


NOTE
You can press (Clear) to clear your entry.

7 Press [R-key Setting] 1 select [PSTN] or [PBX].

[PSTN]: Select if your machine is connected to an outside line.


[PBX]: Select if your machine is connected through a PBX.

l If you select [PSTN]:


t Press [OK] 1 [OK].
System Manager Settings

11

11-8 Communications Settings


l If you select [PBX]:
t Select the type of PBX you are using.

If you select [Prefix]:


• Press [Code].

• Enter the prefix code using - (numeric keys) 1 press [OK].

System Manager Settings


Be sure to enter a pause after the prefix code. If you press [Pause] at the end of the prefix code, <P>
is displayed. If you do not insert a pause, the prefix code is not registered.
You can enter up to 20 digits for a prefix code.
Press [Backspace] to delete the last character that you entered. 11
You can press (Clear) to clear your entry.

• Press [OK] 1 [OK] 1 [OK].

Communications Settings 11-9


If you select [Hooking]:
• Press [OK] 1 [OK].

If you select [Earth Connection]:


• Press [OK] 1 [OK].
System Manager Settings

The specified mode is set.

8 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

11

11-10 Communications Settings


Memory RX Inbox Settings
There may be occasions when you want the fax to store all incoming documents into memory until
you are ready to print or send them. Locking the fax to receive and store all documents in memory
is called Memory Lock.
After the memory lock is turned 'On', the fax will automatically enter and leave the Memory Lock
mode at the times you specify. The documents received when the fax is in Memory Lock mode are
stored in memory until you unlock the memory with a password and print or send them.
This section explains how to define a memory lock password and set the times for the fax to enter
and leave the Memory Lock mode.

Setting the Memory RX Inbox Password


You can set the Memory RX (Receive) Inbox with a seven digit password and restrict its use to
those users who know the password.

NOTE
You can enter up to seven digits for the password. If you enter fewer than seven digits, the machine stores the password
with leading zeros.
Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [System Settings] 1 [Communications Settings].


If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Fax Settings," on p. 11-5.

System Manager Settings


If the System Manager ID and System Password have already been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) 1 press (ID).

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the desired setting.

11

Communications Settings 11-11


2 Press [Memory RX Inbox Settings] 1 [Memory RX Inbox Password].

3 Enter the desired password using - (numeric keys) 1 press [OK].


System Manager Settings

If you do not want to set the Memory RX Inbox with a password, do not enter any number.
You cannot store a password with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>.
The selected mode is set.

NOTE
11 If you make a mistake when entering the password, press (Clear) to clear your entry.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

11-12 Communications Settings


Storing Received Fax Documents in Memory
You can set the machine to store received fax documents in memory without printing them. This is
referred to as Memory Lock. You can later check the received documents in the Memory RX Inbox
and print or send them.

NOTE
The default setting is 'Off'.

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [System Settings] 1 [Communications Settings].


If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Fax Settings," on p. 11-5.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have already been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) 1 press (ID).

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the desired setting.

2 Press [Memory RX Inbox Settings] 1 [Use Fax Memory Lock].

System Manager Settings


11

Communications Settings 11-13


3 Select [On] or [Off] 1 press [OK].

The selected mode is set.

IMPORTANT
If the message <Fax Memory RX is on.> does not appear, set Fax Memory Lock on the Memory RX Inbox screen to 'On'.
(See Chapter 4, "Storing Received Documents," in the Mail Box Guide.)

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

Memory Lock Start Time Settings


System Manager Settings

You can set Memory Lock to start automatically at a specified time.

NOTE
The default setting is 'Off'.

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [System Settings] 1 [Communications Settings].


If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Fax Settings," on p. 11-5.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have already been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) 1 press (ID).
11 NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the desired setting.

11-14 Communications Settings


2 Press [Memory RX Inbox Settings] 1 [Memory Lock Start Time].

3 Select [Everyday], [Select Days], or [Off].

System Manager Settings


11

Communications Settings 11-15


l If you select [Everyday]:
t Select a number ([1] to [5]) 1 enter the start time using - (numeric keys) 1 press [OK].

You can store up to five different start times.


Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
Examples:
7:05 a.m. 1 0705
11:18 p.m. 1 2318
If you make a mistake when entering the time, enter another four digit number.
The selected mode is set.
System Manager Settings

NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the time, you can press (Clear) to clear your entry.

l If you select [Select Days]:


t Select a day of the week ([Sun] to [Sat]) 1 select a number ([1] to [5]).
t Enter the start time using - (numeric keys) 1 press [OK].

11

11-16 Communications Settings


You can store up to five different start times for each day of the week.
Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
Examples:
7:05 a.m. 1 0705
11:18 p.m. 1 2318
If you make a mistake when entering the time, enter another four digit number.
The selected mode is set.

NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the time, you can press (Clear) to clear your entry.

l If you select [Off]:


t Press [OK].

System Manager Settings


If you select [Off], Memory Lock is not automatically turned 'On' at a specified time. You can turn
Memory Lock 'On' or 'Off' manually using the Fax Memory Lock setting on the Memory RX Inbox
screen. (See Chapter 4, "Storing Received Documents," in the Mail Box Guide.)
The selected mode is set.

NOTE
You can select [Everyday] for Memory Lock Start Time, and [Select Days] for Memory Lock End Time, and vice versa.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears. 11

Communications Settings 11-17


Memory Lock End Time Settings
You can set Memory Lock to end automatically at a specified time.

NOTE
The default setting is 'Off'.

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [System Settings] 1 [Communications Settings].


If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Fax Settings," on p. 11-3.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have already been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) 1 press (ID).

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the desired setting.

2 Press [Memory RX Inbox Settings] 1 [Memory Lock End Time].


System Manager Settings

11

11-18 Communications Settings


3 Select [Everyday], [Select Days], or [Off].

l If you select [Everyday]:


t Select a number ([1] to [5]) 1 enter the end time using - (numeric keys) 1 press [OK].

System Manager Settings


You can store up to five different end times.
Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
Examples:
7:05 a.m. 1 0705
11:18 p.m. 1 2318 11
If you make a mistake when entering the time, enter another four digit number.
The selected mode is set.

NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the time, you can press (Clear) to clear your entry.

Communications Settings 11-19


l If you select [Select Days]:
t Select a day of the week ([Sun] to [Sat]) 1 select a number ([1] to [5]).
t Enter the end time using - (numeric keys) 1 press [OK].

You can store up to five different end times for each day of the week.
Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
Examples:
7:05 a.m. 1 0705
11:18 p.m. 1 2318
If you make a mistake when entering the time, enter another four digit number.
System Manager Settings

The selected mode is set.

NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the time, you can press (Clear) to clear your entry.

l If you select [Off]:


t Press [OK].

11

11-20 Communications Settings


If you select [Off], Memory Lock is not automatically turned 'Off' at a specified time. You can turn
Memory Lock 'On' or 'Off' manually using Fax Memory Lock on the Memory RX Inbox screen. (See
Chapter 4, "Storing Received Documents," in the Mail Box Guide.)
The selected mode is set.

NOTE
You can select [Everyday] for Memory Lock Start Time, and [Select Days] for Memory Lock End Time, and vice versa.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

System Manager Settings


11

Communications Settings 11-21


Manage/Access to Address Book
You can set the Address Book with a password and access numbers to restrict its use.

Address Book Password


You can set a password for the Address Book. If a password is set, restrictions can be placed on
the registering, editing, or erasing of destinations.

NOTE
You can enter up to seven digits for the password. If you enter fewer than seven digits, the machine stores the password
with leading zeros.
Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [System Settings] 1 [Manage/Access to Address


Book].
System Manager Settings

If the System Manager ID and System Password have already been set, enter the System Manager ID
11 and System Password using - (numeric keys) 1 press (ID).

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the desired setting.

11-22 Manage/Access to Address Book


2 Press [Address Book Password].

3 Enter the desired password using - (numeric keys) 1 press [OK].

System Manager Settings


If you do not want to set the Address Book with a password, do not enter a number.
You cannot store a password with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>.

NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the password, press (Clear) to clear your entry.
11
4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

Manage/Access to Address Book 11-23


Access Number Management
You can set up a private address book using an access number. This feature enables you to
restrict other users from viewing and utilising these special addresses.

NOTE
The default setting is 'Off'.

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [System Settings] 1 [Manage/Access to Address


Book].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Address Book Password," on p. 11-22.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have already been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) 1 press (ID).

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the desired setting.

2 Press [Access Number Management].


System Manager Settings

11

11-24 Manage/Access to Address Book


3 Select [On] or [Off] 1 press [OK].

The selected mode is set.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

System Manager Settings


11

Manage/Access to Address Book 11-25


Forwarding Settings
You can set the machine to store received fax documents in Confidential Fax Inboxes, or forward
them to other machines (relay function). If a received document matches the forwarding conditions,
it is forwarded to the specified destination. This section explains the conditions for forwarding, and
how to register, change, and erase forwarding destinations.
If forwarding conditions are specified, received documents are processed as shown below:

: Default settings or normal


operation
Sender
: Conditional operation

Receive

ON
Forwarded to
Forwarding Settings specified
Forwarding destination
Error
Reception OFF/Does Not
rejected Meet the *1
*2 Conditions Confidential
Fax Inbox
System Manager Settings

Destination(s)
Forward Stored Confirming Details,
w/o Erase, Print of
Conditions*3
Destinations Not
Stored *5
Store Handle
Documents with
Forwarding Store in the
Memory Lock Setting Errors*6 Status Screen
OFF Prints Confirming Details,
ON Resend, Change
Destinations, Erase of
documents with
Print Queue Print Queue transmission error
Memory RX Inbox
*4
11 *4 Confirming Details, Erase,
Print, Send of received
documents

Prints Prints

*1 If Store/Print Received Doc. in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On',
forwarded documents are either printed or stored in the Memory RX Inbox.
*2 If the subaddress and password attached to the received document do not match the information registered in Forwarding
Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the document is rejected.

11-26 Forwarding Settings


*3 If Forward w/o Conditions is set up in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), all
received documents that do not match the specified forwarding conditions are forwarded to the destination selected for
Forward w/o Conditions.
*4 If documents are received while paper is jammed, or paper or toner has run out, it is printed after the paper jam is cleared,
paper is loaded, or toner is added.
*5 If Erase Failed TX is set to 'Off' in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen), the status of any job with a forwarding error will be saved on the System Monitor screen.
*6 Documents with forwarding errors are handled as follows, depending on the settings for Handle Documents with Forwarding
Errors in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen):
• [Always Print]: All documents with forwarding errors are printed.
• [Store/Print]: Documents with forwarding errors are stored in the Memory RX Inbox when Memory Lock is turned
'On'. If Memory Lock is turned 'Off', the documents are printed.

NOTE
• The maximum number of forwarding settings that you can store is 150.
• For instructions on forwarding documents received through the I-Fax function, see Chapter 10, "System Manager
Settings," in the Sending Guide.

Storing Forwarding Settings

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [System Settings] 1 [Forwarding Settings].

System Manager Settings


If the System Manager ID and System Password have already been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) 1 press (ID).

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the desired setting. 11

Forwarding Settings 11-27


2 Press [Register].

3 To recall the forwarding settings of a received document that you have set, press
[1 Before], [2 Before], or [3 Before].
System Manager Settings

You can recall the last three forwarding settings.


The recalled forwarding settings are displayed.

IMPORTANT
11 • The forwarding settings are stored in memory if you press [OK] on the Register screen or the Edit screen.
• Identical forwarding settings are stored only once in memory.

NOTE
• The three most recent forwarding settings that were stored in memory are not erased even when the power is turned
OFF.
• Nothing is displayed if you press recall keys that do not have forwarding settings registered in them.

11-28 Forwarding Settings


4 Press [Condition Name].

5 Enter a name for the forwarding condition 1 press [OK].

System Manager Settings


You can enter up to 50 characters for the condition name.

NOTE
For instructions on how to enter characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the Reference Guide .

11

Forwarding Settings 11-29


6 Press [Forwarding Conditions].

7 Press the Receive Type drop-down list 1 select [Fax] or [I-Fax].


System Manager Settings

Colour Universal Send Kit is installed.

If the optional Colour Universal Send Kit is not installed, this step is not necessary.

11

11-30 Forwarding Settings


8 Set the forwarding conditions.
t Select the Fax Number, Subaddress, or Password drop-down list.

The available types of forwarding conditions are:


• [disregarded]: Disregards the Fax Number information as forwarding condition.
• [does not exist]: The Subaddress or Password information does not exist.
• [equals]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number, Subaddress, or Password
information matches the characters entered.
• [differs from]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information differs from the
characters entered.
• [begins with]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information begins with the
characters entered.

System Manager Settings


• [ends with]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information ends with the characters
entered.
• [contains]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information contains the characters
entered.
• [does not contain]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information does not contain the
characters entered.
[does not exist] is not an option for <Fax Number>.
[does not exist] and [equals] are the only forwarding conditions that can be selected for <Subaddress>
and <Password>.

11

Forwarding Settings 11-31


t Select the forwarding condition type 1 enter the forwarding condition using - (numeric keys).

[O] [P]: Press to move the cursor to the desired position.


[Backspace]: Press when a wrong number is entered. The number immediately to the left of the
cursor is deleted, enabling you to enter the correct number.
[Space]: Press to insert a space between numbers.
[+]: Press to insert a "+" between the country code and the fax number.

t If necessary, repeat this step for other drop-down list(s).


If you want to change the values for the forwarding conditions without changing the forwarding
condition type after having specified the Fax Number, Subaddress, and Password settings, press
[Set.] next to the value that you want to change, and enter the new value.
System Manager Settings

NOTE
• If [disregarded] or [does not exist] is selected, you cannot enter any values for forwarding conditions.
• You can enter up to 20 characters for the Fax Number, Subaddress, or Password forwarding condition. The characters
that can be entered are:
– Fax Number: 0 to 9, [Space], [+]
– Subaddress: 0 to 9, , , [Space]
– Password: 0 to 9, , , [Space]
• If you want to select a Confidential Fax Inbox as the forwarding destination, set the conditions as follows:
– Fax Number: [disregarded] Fax Number: [equals]
– Subaddress: [equals] or Subaddress: [does not exist]
– Password: [does not exist] or [equals] Password: [does not exist]

11

11-32 Forwarding Settings


• You cannot set the following combinations of conditions.

Fax Number Subaddress Password


[disregarded] [does not exist] [equals]
other than [disregarded] [equals] [equals]
other than [disregarded] [does not exist] [equals]
other than [disregarded] [equals] [does not exist]

9 Press [Done].

System Manager Settings


10 Press [Forwarding Destination] 1 select [Address Book] or [Conf. Fax Inbox].

11

[Address Book]: Select to forward the received document to another machine (relay function).
[Conf. Fax Inbox]: Select to store the received document in a Confidential Fax Inbox.

Forwarding Settings 11-33


NOTE
• If the selected destination is a group address that contains a User Inbox, the document is not sent and stored in that
inbox.
• [Conf. Fax Inbox] cannot be selected if you do not set the conditions as follows:
– Fax Number: [disregarded] Fax Number: [equals]
– Subaddress: [equals] or Subaddress: [does not exist]
– Password: [does not exist] or [equals] Password: [does not exist]

l If you select [Address Book]:


t Select the forwarding destination.
If Access Number Management is set to 'On', and you want to select a destination that is stored with
an access number or in a private address book:
• Press [Access Number].
System Manager Settings

• Enter the access number for the private address book or destination using - (numeric keys)
1 press [OK].

11

If you press [No Access Number], the destinations that are not managed with the Access Number
setting are displayed.
If you press [Cancel], the display returns to the screen that was displayed before pressing [Access
Number].

11-34 Forwarding Settings


• Select the destination 1 press [OK].

If Access Number Management is set to 'Off', or the destination is not stored with an access number or
in a private address book:
• Select the destination 1 press [OK].

System Manager Settings


Press the alphabet keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the range of entries. Press the same key again to
return to the full address list.
If the destination to be selected is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the destination.
You can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the list by pressing the Type drop-down list.
Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books (subaddress book 1 to
11
10, or one-touch buttons), which categorizes the addresses stored in the Address Book. You can
select one of these to limit the display of destinations.
You cannot select multiple destinations. To forward to multiple addresses, select a group address.
If the optional Colour Universal Send Kit is installed, you can also select an e-mail, I-fax, or file server
address as the forwarding destination.

Forwarding Settings 11-35


NOTE
• To display [Access Number], set Access Number Management to 'On'. To access Access Number Management, press
(Additional Functions) 1 [System Settings] 1 [Manage/Access to Address Book] 1 [Access Number
Management]. (See "Access Number Management," on p. 11-23.)
• To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.
• To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination 1 press [Details].
• To be able to select destinations, it is necessary to register destinations in the Address Book beforehand. (See
"Registering New Addresses," on p. 10-4.)

l If you select [Conf. Fax Inbox]:


t Select the Confidential Fax Inbox to forward to 1 press [OK].

If the desired Confidential Fax Inbox is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the desired
System Manager Settings

Confidential Fax Inbox.


You cannot select multiple Confidential Fax Inboxes.

IMPORTANT
• You cannot select a Confidential Fax Inbox that is already set with other forwarding conditions.
• Documents cannot be forwarded to Confidential Fax Inboxes in the following cases: (The actual numbers may be less
than that given below, depending on the conditions under which the hard disk is used.)
- When a total of 1,000 documents or images have been stored in all the inboxes
- When a total of approximately 3,700 pages of documents or images have been stored in all the inboxes

11

11-36 Forwarding Settings


11 Press [Forwarding Time].

12 Select [Everyday], [Select Days], or [Off].

System Manager Settings


IMPORTANT
The start time and end time cannot be set with the same time.

11

Forwarding Settings 11-37


l If you select [Everyday]:
t Enter the start time and end time using - (numeric keys) 1 press [OK].

You can set any time within 00:00 to 23:59.


Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.

l If you select [Select Days]:


t Select a day of the week ([Sun] to [Sat]) 1 enter the start time and end time using - (numeric
keys) 1 press [OK].
System Manager Settings

You can set anytime within 00:00 to 23:59.


11 Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
If you press [All Day], the start and end time are automatically set to '00:00' and '23:59' respectively.

11-38 Forwarding Settings


l If you select [Off]:
t Press [OK].

13 Press the Store/Print Received Doc. drop-down list 1 select [On] or [Off].

System Manager Settings


If you selected a Confidential Fax Inbox as the forwarding destination, this step is not necessary.
[On]: The received document is stored in the Memory RX Inbox or printed.
[Off]: The received document is not stored in the Memory RX Inbox or printed.

NOTE 11
If <Store/Print Received Doc.> is set to 'On' and the Memory Lock setting is set to 'On', the received document is stored
in the Memory RX Inbox. If <Store/Print Received Doc.> is set to 'On' and the Memory Lock setting is set to 'Off', the
received document is printed. (See "Storing Received Fax Documents in Memory," on p. 11-13, and Chapter 6,
"Receiving Documents.")

Forwarding Settings 11-39


14 Press [OK].

The selected mode is set.

IMPORTANT
• You cannot set to forward the same document to multiple Confidential Fax Inboxes at the same time.
• You cannot set multiple forwarding conditions that contain the same subaddress setting.

15 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

When Forwarding Destinations Do Not Match the


System Manager Settings

Forwarding Conditions
You can store the forwarding destinations of a received document if the forwarding settings of the
received document are not registered, or if the received document does not match all of the
forwarding conditions that you have set.

IMPORTANT
If the subaddress and password specified from the sending machine do not match the forwarding conditions registered
in the forwarding settings, the documents are not forwarded to forwarding destinations registered as Forward w/o
Conditions in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), and reception of the
documents is rejected.

11 NOTE
• Forwarding destinations can be stored one at a time, according to the receive type of the received document.
• You cannot forward a received document to a Confidential Fax Inbox.

11-40 Forwarding Settings


1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [System Settings] 1 [Forwarding Settings].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Storing Forwarding Settings," on p. 11-26.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have already been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) 1 press (ID).

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the desired setting.

2 Press [Forward w/o Conditions].

System Manager Settings


3 Press the Receive Type drop-down list 1 select [Fax] or [I-Fax].

11

Colour Universal Send Kit is installed.

Forwarding Settings 11-41


If the optional Colour Universal Send Kit is not installed, this step is not necessary.

4 Press [Forwarding Destination].


System Manager Settings

11

11-42 Forwarding Settings


5 Select the forwarding destination.

l If Access Number Management is set to 'On', and you want to select a destination that is
stored with an access number or in a private address book:
t Press [Access Number].

t Enter the access number for the private address book or destination using - (numeric keys) 1
press [OK].

System Manager Settings


If you press [No Access Number], the destinations that are not managed with the Access Number
setting are displayed.
If you press [Cancel], the display returns to the screen that was displayed before pressing [Access
11
Number].

Forwarding Settings 11-43


t Select the destination 1 press [OK].

l If Access Number Management is set to 'Off', or the destination is not stored with an
access number or in a private address book:
t Select the destination 1 press [OK].
System Manager Settings

Press the alphabet keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the range of entries. Press the same key again to return
to the full address list.
If the destination to be selected is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the destination.
You can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the list by pressing the Type drop-down list.
11 Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books (subaddress book 1 to 10, or
one-touch buttons), which categorizes the addresses stored in the Address Book. You can select one of
these to limit the display of destinations.
You cannot select multiple destinations.
If the optional Colour Universal Send Kit is installed, you can also select an e-mail, I-fax, or file server
address as the forwarding destination.

11-44 Forwarding Settings


NOTE
• To display [Access Number], set Access Number Management to 'On'. To access Access Number Management, press
(Additional Functions) 1 [System Settings] 1 [Manage/Access to Address Book] 1 [Access Number
Management]. (See "Access Number Management," on p. 11-24.)
• To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.
• To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination 1 press [Details].
• To be able to select destinations, it is necessary to register destinations in the Address Book beforehand. (See
"Registering New Addresses," on p. 10-4.)

6 Press the Store/Print Received Doc. drop-down list 1 select [On] or [Off].

[On]: The received document is stored in the Memory RX Inbox or printed.

System Manager Settings


[Off]: The received document is not stored in the Memory RX Inbox or printed.

NOTE
If <Store/Print Received Doc.> is set to 'On' and the Memory Lock setting is set to 'On', the received document is stored
in the Memory RX Inbox. If <Store/Print Received Doc.> is set to 'On' and the Memory Lock setting is set to 'Off', the
received document is printed. (See "Storing Received Fax Documents in Memory," on p. 11-13, and Chapter 6,
"Receiving Documents.")

11

Forwarding Settings 11-45


7 Press [OK].

The selected mode is set.

8 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

Checking/Changing Forwarding Settings


You can check or change forwarding settings that have been stored.
System Manager Settings

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [System Settings] 1 [Forwarding Settings].


If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Storing Forwarding Settings," on p. 11-26.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have already been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) 1 press (ID).

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the desired setting.

11

11-46 Forwarding Settings


2 Select the forwarding setting whose details you want to check 1 press [Edit].

If the desired setting is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the desired setting.

3 Check or change the forwarding settings 1 press [OK].

System Manager Settings


Press [N] or [M] to display and check all the specified forwarding conditions.

NOTE
For instructions on how to change forwarding settings, see "Storing Forwarding Settings," on p. 11-26.
11
4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

Forwarding Settings 11-47


Forwarding Received Documents
You can set whether received documents are forwarded.

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [System Settings] 1 [Forwarding Settings].


If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Storing Forwarding Settings," on p. 11-26.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have already been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) 1 press (ID).

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the desired setting.

2 Select the desired forwarding setting 1 press [Validate/Invalidate].


System Manager Settings

On: The received document is forwarded to the specified destination if it matches the forwarding
conditions.
Off: The received document is not forwarded to the specified destination even if it matches the
forwarding conditions.
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the desired setting.
To cancel forwarding, press [Validate/Invalidate] again.
11 The selected forwarding setting is enabled.

11-48 Forwarding Settings


3 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

Erasing Forwarding Settings


You can erase forwarding settings that have been stored.

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [System Settings] 1 [Forwarding Settings].


If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Storing Forwarding Settings," on p. 11-26.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have already been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) 1 press (ID).

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the desired setting.

2 Select the forwarding setting that you want to erase 1 press [Erase].

System Manager Settings


If the desired setting is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the desired setting.

11

Forwarding Settings 11-49


3 Press [Yes].

To cancel erasing the forwarding setting, press [No].


The selected forwarding setting is erased.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

Printing Forwarding Settings


You can print out the contents of stored forwarding settings.
System Manager Settings

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [System Settings] 1 [Forwarding Settings].


If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Storing Forwarding Settings," on p. 11-26.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have already been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) 1 press (ID).

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [N] or [M] to scroll to the desired setting.

11

11-50 Forwarding Settings


2 Press [Print List].

NOTE
The forwarding settings can be printed only if A3, A4, or A4R (plain, recycled, or colour paper) is loaded in the paper
sources whose settings in Other in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) are set to 'On'. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)

3 Press [Yes].

System Manager Settings


To cancel printing, press [No].
The forwarding settings are printed.
11

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

Forwarding Settings 11-51


LDAP Server Settings
If the information for an LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) server is registered in the
machine, you can search for fax numbers through the LDAP server. Fax numbers obtained through
the server can be specified as destinations or stored into the Address Book.

NOTE
• The following types of LDAP servers can be used with this machine:
- Windows 2000 Server with Active Directory
- Novell NetWare 5.1 (NDS) or later
- Lotus Notes Domino R5 or later
For more information, contact your local authorised Canon dealer.
• You can register up to a maximum of five LDAP servers.

Registering an LDAP Server


You have to specify the relevant information for the LDAP server, such as the server name and
server address.

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [System Settings].


System Manager Settings

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Fax Settings," on p. 11-5.


If the System Manager ID and System Password have already been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) 1 press (ID).

11

11-52 LDAP Server Settings


2 [M] until [Register LDAP Server] appears 1 press [Register LDAP Server].
[N] or [M
Press [N

3 Press [Register].

System Manager Settings


11

LDAP Server Settings 11-53


4 Press [Server Name].

5 Enter the server name 1 press [OK].


System Manager Settings

You can enter up to 24 characters for the server name.


You can also use - (numeric keys) to enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your entry.

NOTE
For instructions on how to enter characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the Reference Guide .
11

11-54 LDAP Server Settings


6 Press [Server Address].

7 Enter the server's address 1 press [OK].

System Manager Settings


You can enter up to 48 characters for the server address.
You can also use - (numeric keys) to enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your entry.

IMPORTANT
If <Login Information> is set to 'Use (security auth.)' for the LDAP server and Reverse DNS Lookup (function that looks
up the host name from the IP address) is not supported, enter a host name and not an IP address. 11

LDAP Server Settings 11-55


8 Press [Location to Start Search].

If the server's LDAP version is 3, then you do not have to specify [Location to Start Search]. (If the LDAP
version is 3, the machine automatically retrieves settings from the server and sets the location to start
searching.) If the server's LDAP version is 2, you have to specify [Location to Start Search].

9 Enter the location to start searching 1 press [OK].


System Manager Settings

Enter the location to start searching according to the type of LDAP server you are using, or as described
below.
11 • If you are using Windows 2000 Server with Active Directory:
Add "DC=" to each dot-separated series of characters in the Active Directory domain name, and separate each series of
characters by a comma.
Example: If <team1.salesdept.canon.co.jp> is the domain name in Active Directory:
DC=team1, DC=salesdept, DC=canon, DC=co, DC=jp

11-56 LDAP Server Settings


• If you are using Novell NetWare 5.1 (NDS) or later:
Add the corresponding object class "o=", "ou=", or "c=" to each dot-separated series of characters that configure the
distinguished name, and separate each series of characters by a comma.
Example: If <TEAM1.SALESDEPT.CANON> is the distinguished name in NDS:
ou=team1, ou=salesdept, o=canon
• If you are using Lotus Notes Domino R5 or later:
Enter the dn (Distinguished Name) of the node on the directory tree, such as "ou=team1", "ou=salesdept", "o=canon", or
"c=jp".
You can enter up to 128 characters for the location to start searching.
You can also use - (numeric keys) to enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your entry.

10 Select [On] or [Off] for <Use SSL> (Secure Sockets Layer).

System Manager Settings


[On]: SSL is used.
[Off]: SSL is not used.

11

LDAP Server Settings 11-57


11 Press [ ] under <Port Number> 1 enter the port number using - (numeric
keys).

You can enter any port number from 1 to 65,535.


If you make a mistake when entering the port number, press (Clear) 1 enter the correct number.

12 Press [ ] under <Max. No. of Addresses to Search> 1 enter the maximum number of
addresses to search using - (numeric keys).
System Manager Settings

11 You can enter any number from 1 to 1,000.


If you make a mistake when entering the number, press (Clear) 1 enter the correct number.

11-58 LDAP Server Settings


13 Press [ ] under <Search Timeout> 1 enter the timeout time, in seconds, using
- (numeric keys) 1 press [Next].

You can enter any timeout value from 30 to 300 seconds, in one second increments.
If you make a mistake when entering the timeout value, press (Clear) 1 enter the correct value.

14 Select [Do not use], [Use], or [Use (security auth.)].

System Manager Settings


IMPORTANT 11
• [Use (security auth.)] next to <Login Information> can be selected only if the LDAP server is running on Windows 2000
Server with Active Directory.
• If you entered an IP address in step 7, and Reverse DNS Lookup (function that looks up the host name from the IP
address) is not supported, select either [Do not use] or [Use].

LDAP Server Settings 11-59


• If <Login Information> is set to 'Use (security auth.)', the machine may not be able to connect to the LDAP server if
Date & Time Settings under Timer Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is different from the time setting on
the LDAP server.

l If [Do not use] is selected:


t Select the Server LDAP version and character code 1 press [OK].

Select the LDAP version and character code according to the LDAP server's environment.

l If [Use] is selected:
t Press [User].
System Manager Settings

11

11-60 LDAP Server Settings


t Enter the user name 1 press [OK].

Enter the user name according to the type of LDAP server you are using.
• If you are using Windows 2000 Server with Active Directory:
Press [User] 1 enter <Windows domain name/Windows user name>.
Example: If <team1> is the Windows domain name, and <user1> is the Windows user name:
team1/user1
• If you are using Novell NetWare 5.1 (NDS) or later:
Press [User] 1 add the corresponding object class "o=", "ou=", or "c=" to each dot-separated series
of characters that configure the distinguished name, and separate each series of characters by a
comma.
Example: If <user1.TEAM1.SALESDEPT.CANON> is the distinguished name in NDS:
cn=user1, ou=team1, ou=salesdept, o=canon

System Manager Settings


• If you are using Lotus Notes Domino R5 or later:
Press [User] 1 enter the dn (Distinguished Name) of the user, such as "cn=admin", "ou=team1", or
"o=salesdept".
You can enter up to 128 characters for the user name.
t Press [Password].

11

LDAP Server Settings 11-61


t Enter the password 1 press [OK].

You can enter up to 24 characters for the password.


After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks (*****) on the Register LDAP
Server screen.
t Select [On] or [Off] for <Display authentication dialog when searching>.
System Manager Settings

[On]: When searching, displays the login information dialog even when password is not required.
[Off]: When searching, does not display the login information dialog when password is not required.

11

11-62 LDAP Server Settings


t Select the Server LDAP version and character code 1 press [OK].

Select the LDAP version and character code according to the LDAP server's environment.

l If [Use (security auth.)] is selected:


t Press [User].

System Manager Settings


11

LDAP Server Settings 11-63


t Enter the user name 1 press [OK].

You can enter up to 128 characters for the user name.


Example: If <user1> is the Windows user name:
user1

t Press [Password].
System Manager Settings

t Enter the password 1 press [OK].

11

11-64 LDAP Server Settings


You can enter up to 24 characters for the password.
After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks (*****) on the Register LDAP
Server screen.
t Press [Domain Name].

t Enter the domain name 1 press [OK].

System Manager Settings


Enter the directory tree name of the Active Directory, such as <team1.salesdept.canon.co.jp>.
You can enter up to 128 characters for the domain name.

11

LDAP Server Settings 11-65


t Select [On] or [Off] for <Display authentication dialog when searching> 1 press [OK].

[On]: When searching, displays the login information dialog even when password is not required.
[Off]: When searching, does not display the login information dialog when password is not required.

The display returns to the screen of step 3.

15 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.
System Manager Settings

11

11-66 LDAP Server Settings


Changing an LDAP Server Setting
You can change the settings for a stored LDAP server.

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [System Settings].


If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Fax Settings," on p. 11-4.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have already been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) 1 press (ID).

2 [M] until [Register LDAP Server] appears 1 press [Register LDAP Server].
[N] or [M
Press [N
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 2 of "Registering an LDAP Server," on p. 11-52.

3 Select the LDAP server whose settings you want to change 1 press [Edit].

System Manager Settings


The settings for the selected LDAP server are displayed.

11

LDAP Server Settings 11-67


4 Change the necessary settings 1 press [Next].

5 Select [Do not use], [Use], or [Use (security auth.)] 1 change the settings for the
selected mode 1 press [OK].
System Manager Settings

The display returns to the screen of step 3.

6 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.
11

11-68 LDAP Server Settings


Erasing an LDAP Server
You can erase a stored LDAP server.

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [System Settings].


If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Fax Settings," on p. 11-4.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have already been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) 1 press (ID).

2 [M] until [Register LDAP Server] appears 1 press [Register LDAP Server].
[N] or [M
Press [N
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 2 of "Registering an LDAP Server," on p. 11-52.

3 Select the LDAP server that you want to erase 1 press [Erase].

System Manager Settings


11

LDAP Server Settings 11-69


4 Press [Yes].

To cancel erasing the LDAP server, press [No].


The selected LDAP server is erased.

5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

Printing LDAP Server Settings


You can print out the LDAP server settings.
System Manager Settings

NOTE
For details on the Registered LDAP Server List, see "Registered LDAP Server List," on p. 14-16.

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [System Settings].


If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Fax Settings," on p. 11-4.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have already been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) 1 press (ID).

11 2 [M] until [Register LDAP Server] appears 1 press [Register LDAP Server].
[N] or [M
Press [N
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 2 of "Registering an LDAP Server," on p. 11-52.

11-70 LDAP Server Settings


3 Press [Print List].

NOTE
The Registered LDAP Server List can be printed only if A3, A4, or A4R (plain, recycled, or colour paper) is loaded in the
paper sources whose settings in Other in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) are set to 'On'. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)

4 Press [Yes].

System Manager Settings


To cancel printing, press [No].
The Registered LDAP Server List is printed.
11

5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

LDAP Server Settings 11-71


System Manager Settings

11

11-72 LDAP Server Settings


Printing Communication
Reports
This chapter explains the method of setting the contents of a communications report and printing lists of
12 CHAPTER

the Fax function.

Report Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2


Specifying Report Settings.
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Send TX Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Fax TX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Fax Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Fax RX Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Printing Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
Address Book List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
User's Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21

12-1
Report Settings Table
The following items can be stored or set in Report Settings from the Additional Functions screen.

n Settings

Applicable
Item Settings
Page
Send
For Error Only*, On, Off
TX Report p. 12-4
Error Copy Print (Black Only): On*, Off
Activity Report
Auto Print On*, Off
On, Off* p. 12-6
Daily Activity Report Time
Time Setting: 00:00 to 23:59
Send/Receive Separate (Not selected*)

Fax
For Error Only*, On, Off
Printing Communication Reports

Fax TX Report p. 12-9


Error Copy Print: On*, Off
Fax Activity Report
Auto Print On*, Off
On, Off* p. 12-12
Daily Activity Report Time
Time Setting: 00:00 to 23:59
Send/Receive Separate (Not selected*)
Fax RX Report For Error Only, On, Off* p. 12-15
Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report On, Off* p. 12-17

An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.

12

12-2 Report Settings Table


n Print List

Applicable
Item Settings
Page
Send
Address Book 1 to 10, One-touch Buttons
Address Book List p. 12-19
Print List: Print
User's Data List Print p. 12-21

Fax
User's Data List Print p. 12-21

NOTE
For instructions on how to set the modes or settings not described in this manual, refer to the other manuals listed in the
front of this Facsimile Guide. (See "Manuals for the Machine," on p. ii.)

Printing Communication Reports

12

Report Settings Table 12-3


Specifying Report Settings
You can specify how the Fax TX Report and the Fax Activity Report are printed.

Send TX Report
The Send TX Report enables you to check whether the documents were sent correctly to the
intended destination. A Send TX Report can automatically be printed after the documents are sent.
You can also set the machine to print a Send TX Report only when a transmission error occurs.
You can adjust the Send TX Report setting to print the first part of the document as part of the
report to remind you of the document's contents.

NOTE
• If you send a fax or an error occurs while a fax is being sent, a Fax TX Report is printed together with the Send TX
Report, depending on the settings made in Fax TX Report in Report Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
• If the optional Colour Universal Send Kit is installed, the results of e-mail, I-fax, and file server transmissions can also
be printed in the same way. (See Chapter 11, "System Manager Settings," in the Facsimile Guide.)
• For an example of a Send TX Report, see "Send TX Report," on p. 14-3.
• The default settings are as follows:
- TX Report: For Error Only
- Error Copy Print: On
Printing Communication Reports

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Report Settings].

12

12-4 Specifying Report Settings


2 Press [Send] under <Settings>.

3 Press [TX Report].

Printing Communication Reports


4 Select [For Error Only], [On], or [Off].

12

Specifying Report Settings 12-5


l If you select [For Error Only] or [On]:
t Select [On] or [Off] for <Error Copy Print (Black Only)> 1 press [OK].
[On]: Part of the sent document is printed on the report.
[Off]: The contents of the sent document are not printed on the report at all.
The selected mode is set.

l If you select [Off]:


t Press [OK].
No Send TX Report will be printed.
The selected mode is set.

5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

Activity Report
The Activity Report is a printed log that shows the results of send and receive jobs. You can set for
the Activity Report to be printed at a specified time or be automatically printed when the number of
send and receive transmissions reaches 100. You can also set that the send and receive logs are
printed separately.
An Activity Report can be printed manually from the System Monitor screen. (See "Printing the
Send Job Status/Log," on p. 8-15, and "Printing the Receive Job Log," on p. 8-26.)
Printing Communication Reports

NOTE
• If the optional Colour Universal Send Kit is installed, the logs of e-mail, I-fax, and file server transmissions can also be
combined and printed. (See Chapter 11, "System Manager Settings," in the Facsimile Guide.)
• For an example of an Activity Report, see "Activity Report," on p. 14-11.
• The default settings are:
- Auto Print: On
- Daily Activity Report Time: Off
- Send/Receive Separate: (Not selected)

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Report Settings] 1 [Send] under <Settings>.


If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Send TX Report," on p. 12-4.

12

12-6 Specifying Report Settings


2 Press [Activity Report].

3 Select [On] or [Off] for <Auto Print>.

Printing Communication Reports


[On]: The Activity Report is automatically printed when the number of send and receive
transmissions reaches 100.
[Off]: The Activity Report is not automatically printed when the number of send and receive
transmissions reaches 100.

12

Specifying Report Settings 12-7


4 Select [On] or [Off] for <Daily Activity Report Time>.

[On]: The Daily Activity Report is printed at the specified time.


[Off]: The Daily Activity Report Time setting is not specified.

l If you select [On]:


t Enter the time using - (numeric keys).
Printing Communication Reports

Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
Examples:
7:05 a.m. 1 0705
11:18 p.m. 1 2318
12 If you make a mistake when entering the time, enter another four digit number.
If the number of transmissions reaches 100 before the set Daily Activity Report Time arrives, an
Activity Report for the 100 transmissions will be printed, starting from the newest transmission.

NOTE
You can press (Clear) to clear your entry.

12-8 Specifying Report Settings


5 Select whether the send and receive logs should be printed separately 1 press [OK].

To print the send and receive logs separately, press [Send/Receive Separate] to select it.
If it is not necessary to print the send and receive logs separately, do not press [Send/Receive Separate].
The selected mode is set.

6 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

Fax TX Report

Printing Communication Reports


The Fax TX Report enables you to check whether the documents were sent correctly to the
intended destination. A Fax TX Report can automatically be printed after the documents are sent.
You can also set the machine to print a Fax TX Report only when a transmission error occurs.
You can adjust the Fax TX Report setting to print the first part of the document as part of the report
to remind you of the document's contents.

NOTE
• For an example of a Fax TX Report, see "Fax TX Report/Fax Error TX Report," on p. 14-5.
• If TX Report in Report Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'For Error Only' or 'On', a Send TX
Report is printed together with the Fax TX Report.
• The default settings are as follows:
- Fax TX Report: For Error Only
- Error Copy Print: On

12

Specifying Report Settings 12-9


1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Report Settings].

2 Press [Fax] under <Settings>.


Printing Communication Reports

3 Press [Fax TX Report].

12

12-10 Specifying Report Settings


4 Select [For Error Only], [On], or [Off].

l If you select [For Error Only] or [On]:


t Select [On] or [Off] for <Error Copy Print> 1 press [OK].
[On]: Part of the sent document is printed on the report.
[Off]: The contents of the sent document are not printed on the report at all.
The selected mode is set.

l If you select [Off]:


t Press [OK].

Printing Communication Reports


No Fax TX Report will be printed.
The selected mode is set.

5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

12

Specifying Report Settings 12-11


Fax Activity Report
The Fax Activity Report is a printed log that shows the results of send and receive jobs. You can
set the Fax Activity Report to be printed at a specified time or be automatically printed when the
number of send and receive transmissions reaches 40. You can also set that the send and receive
logs are printed separately.
A Fax Activity Report can be manually printed at any time from the System Monitor screen. (See
"Printing the Fax Activity Report," on p. 8-21.)

NOTE
• For an example of a Fax Activity Report, see "Fax Activity Report," on p. 14-13.
• The default settings are:
- Auto Print: On
- Daily Activity Report Time: Off
- Send/Receive Separate: (Not selected)

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Report Settings] 1 [Fax] under <Settings>.


If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Fax TX Report," on p. 12-9.

2 Press [Fax Activity Report].


Printing Communication Reports

12

12-12 Specifying Report Settings


3 Select [On] or [Off] for <Auto Print>.

[On]: The Fax Activity Report is automatically printed when the number of send and receive
transmissions reaches 40.
[Off]: The Fax Activity Report is not automatically printed when the number of send and receive
transmissions reaches 40.

4 Select [On] or [Off] for <Daily Activity Report Time>.

Printing Communication Reports


[On]: The Daily Fax Activity Report is printed at the specified time.
[Off]: The Daily Activity Report Time setting is not specified.

12

Specifying Report Settings 12-13


l If you select [On]:
t Enter the time using - (numeric keys).

Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
Examples:
7:05 a.m. 1 0705
11:18 p.m. 1 2318
If you make a mistake when entering the time, enter another four digit number.
If the number of transmissions reaches 40 before the set Daily Activity Report Time arrives, a Fax
Activity Report for the 40 transmissions will be printed, starting from the newest transmission.

NOTE
Printing Communication Reports

You can press (Clear) to clear your entry.

12

12-14 Specifying Report Settings


5 Select whether the send and receive logs should be printed separately 1 press [OK].

To print the send and receive logs separately, press [Send/Receive Separate] to select it.
If it is not necessary to print the send and receive logs separately, do not press [Send/Receive Separate].
The selected mode is set.

6 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

Fax RX Report

Printing Communication Reports


The Fax RX Report enables you to check whether the documents were sent correctly from the
sender's machine and were received successfully by this machine. A Fax RX Report can
automatically be printed after documents are received. You can also set the machine to print a Fax
RX Report only when a reception error occurs.

NOTE
• For an example of a Fax RX Report, see "Fax RX Report," on p. 14-8.
• The default setting is 'Off'.

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Report Settings] 1 [Fax] under <Settings>.


If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Fax TX Report," on p. 12-9.

12

Specifying Report Settings 12-15


2 Press [Fax RX Report].

3 Select [For Error Only], [On], or [Off] 1 press [OK].


Printing Communication Reports

[For Error Only]: Prints a report only when a reception error occurs.
[On]: Prints a report each time a document is received.
[Off]: Does not print a report.
The selected mode is set.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.
12

12-16 Specifying Report Settings


Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report
The Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report enables you to check the reception of documents in
Confidential Fax Inboxes.

NOTE
• For an example of a Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report, see "Confidential Fax Inbox Reception Report," on p. 14-9.
• The default setting is 'On'.

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Report Settings] 1 [Fax] under <Settings>.


If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Fax TX Report," on p. 12-9.

2 Press [Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report].

Printing Communication Reports

12

Specifying Report Settings 12-17


3 Select [On] or [Off] 1 press [OK].

The selected mode is set.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.
Printing Communication Reports

12

12-18 Specifying Report Settings


Printing Lists
You can print the contents of the Address Book or the Send settings specified from the Additional
Functions screen.

NOTE
The lists can be printed only if A3, A4, or A4R (plain, recycled, or colour paper) is loaded in the paper sources whose
settings in Other in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are set to
'On'. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)

Address Book List


You can print the contents of the Address Book (subaddress book 1 to 10 or one-touch buttons).
This is useful for checking the details of the destinations.

IMPORTANT
Even if Access Number Management in Manage/Access to Address Book in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) is set to 'On', all the destinations in the selected subaddress book are printed if you select it and press
[Print List].

NOTE
For an example of an Address Book List, see "Address Book List," on p. 14-17.

Printing Communication Reports


1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Report Settings].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Fax TX Report," on p. 12-9.

12

Printing Lists 12-19


2 Press [Send] under <Print List>.

3 Press [Address Book List].


Printing Communication Reports

4 Select one of the subaddress books (1 to 10) or [One-touch Buttons] 1 press [Print
List].

12

12-20 Printing Lists


5 Press [Yes].

To cancel printing, press [No].


The Address Book List is printed.

6 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

User's Data List


You can print the contents of the Send settings specified from the Additional Functions screen. This

Printing Communication Reports


is useful for checking the details of the settings.

NOTE
• The following two types of User's Data Lists are available:
- Send: Prints all information related to the Send function stored from the Additional Functions screen.
- Fax: Prints all information related to the Fax function stored from the Additional Functions screen.
• For an example of the User's Data List, see "User's Data List," on p. 14-18.

1 Press (Additional Functions) 1 [Report Settings].


If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Fax TX Report," on p. 12-9.

12

Printing Lists 12-21


2 Select [Send] or [Fax] under <Print List>.

3 Press [User's Data List].


Printing Communication Reports

In the example above, [Send] is selected.

12

12-22 Printing Lists


4 Press [Yes].

To cancel printing, press [No].


The User's Data List is printed.

5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Fax Basic Features screen appears.

Printing Communication Reports

12

Printing Lists 12-23


Printing Communication Reports

12

12-24
Printing Lists
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes procedures for taking corrective action in the event that trouble occurs. The end
13 CHAPTER

of the chapter shows you how to respond to error messages and contains a list of frequently asked
questions and answers.

When Problems Occur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2


Sending Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Receiving Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Other Situations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Self-Diagnostic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
List of Error Codes without Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Questions & Answers.
Answers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

13-1
When Problems Occur

Sending Documents
To cancel transmissions.

Q Do you want to cancel while the document is being scanned?

A Press (Stop) from the control panel, or press [Cancel] on the touch panel display.

Q Do you want to cancel after the document has been scanned?

A Press [System Monitor] 1 [Fax] 1 [Send Job Status] 1 select the document that you want to
cancel 1 press [Cancel] 1 [Yes]. However documents that are being sent may not be cancelled
even if you press [Cancel]. (See "Using the System Monitor Screen," on p. 1-44.)

Document cannot be sent.

Q Is the telephone line type set correctly?

A Check the type of telephone line that has been set. (See "Selecting the Type of Telephone Line,"
on p. 1-11.)

Q Is the destination setting correct?

A Make sure you have entered the correct fax number, and dial again.

Q Is the destination stored in the Address Book correct?

A Check the destination in the Address Book. (See "Editing Address Details," on p. 10-34.)
Troubleshooting

Q If you are sending with a Subaddress setting, did you enter the correct subaddress and password
for the destination that you are sending to?

A Check the Subaddress and Password settings.

Q Has trouble occurred in the remote machine?

A Check to ensure that the remote machine can receive documents. If it cannot, check to see
13 whether the machine is switched OFF, is out of recording paper, or has insufficient available
memory.

13-2 When Problems Occur


Memory is full.

Q Are unwanted documents stored in memory?

A Check the TX Document and RX Document memory, and erase unwanted documents or error
documents from memory. (See "Erasing Received Documents," on p. 6-6 or Chapter 5, "Using/
Arranging Documents Stored in an Inbox," in the Mail Box Guide.)

The document does not print clearly on the remote machine.

Q Is the platen glass clean?

A Use your machine to make a copy of the document, and check for streaks. If streaks appear,
clean the platen glass. (See Chapter 7, "Routine Maintenance," in the Reference Guide.)

The density of the documents sent to a remote machine is too light.

Q Is the Exposure setting set towards ' ' and the Original Type setting set to 'Photo'?

A Change the Exposure setting to ' ' and the Original Type setting to 'Text', and send the
document again. (See "Scan Exposure and Original Type Settings," on p. 3-18.)

The machine cannot transmit using a subaddress.

Q Are the subaddress and the password of the remote machine specified correctly?

A Check to see if the remote machine has a subaddress function.

A Check with the remote party to see if the specified subaddress and the RX password at both this
machine and the remote machine are the same.

Q Has trouble occurred in the remote machine (fax)?

A Check to ensure that the remote machine can receive documents. If it cannot, check to see

Troubleshooting
whether the remote machine is out of paper, or has insufficient available memory.

Q Are the subaddress and the password stored in the Address Book correctly?

A Check the stored entries of the Address Book.

13

When Problems Occur 13-3


The remote fax is slow to switch over to the receiving mode, and errors always occur.

Q Is a pause inserted in the fax number?

A If you are sending to a machine that takes time to switch over for fax receiving, insert a pause
after the destination's fax number.

Receiving Documents
The machine does not receive documents.

Q Does the machine have sufficient memory?

A Erase unwanted documents and documents with errors from memory in order to increase the
amount of available memory. (See "Erasing Received Documents," on p. 6-6, and Chapter 5,
"Using/Arranging Documents Stored in an Inbox," in the Mail Box Guide.)

Q Is Receive Password is set in Fax Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from
the Additional Functions screen)?

A If Receive Password is set in System Settings, documents can be received only from senders
that use the correct password. Confirm with your System Manager. (See "Fax Settings," on
p. 11-4.)

Documents cannot be received in memory.

Q Is there sufficient available memory?

A Erase unwanted documents and documents with errors from memory in order to increase the
amount of available memory. (See "Erasing Received Documents," on p. 6-6, and Chapter 5,
"Using/Arranging Documents Stored in an Inbox," in the Mail Box Guide.)

A Erase unwanted documents from the Memory RX Inbox. (See "Erasing Received Documents,"
Troubleshooting

on p. 6-6.)

Quality of printed originals is uneven.

Q Is the platen glass of the sender's machine clean?

A Make a few copies using your machine. If the copies are not streaked, the problem is in the
13 sending party's machine. Contact the sender and ask them to send the document again.

13-4 When Problems Occur


Documents cannot be received in the Confidential Fax Inboxes.

Q Are the forwarding conditions in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) set correctly?

A Check the Forwarding Conditions and inform the sender of those settings. (See "Forwarding
Settings," on p. 11-26.)

Q Are the Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) set to 'On'
using [Validate/Invalidate]?

A The Forwarding Settings must be set to 'On' to be effective. (See "Forwarding Settings," on
p. 11-26.)

Q Is there sufficient available memory?

A Erase unwanted documents and documents with errors from memory in order to increase the
amount of available memory. (See "Erasing Received Documents," on p. 6-6, and Chapter 5,
"Using/Arranging Documents Stored in an Inbox," in the Mail Box Guide.)

A Erase unwanted documents from the Confidential Fax Inbox. (See "Erasing Received
Documents," on p. 6-6.)

Other Situations
Transmissions are slow.

Q Are documents being sent at a high resolution?

A It is recommended that you send text only documents at a low resolution.

Q Is the ECM TX or ECM RX set to 'On' in Fax Settings in Communications Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen)?

Troubleshooting
A Check the ECM TX and ECM RX settings in Fax Settings in Communications Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen). (See "ECM Transmission," on p. 9-43, and "ECM Reception," on
p. 9-50.)

13

When Problems Occur 13-5


Cannot use fax information services.

Q If your fax is connected to a rotary pulse line, is the fax set for tone dialling?

A In the case of a rotary pulse line, you must press tone buttons in order to use fax information
services. (See "Fax Information Services," on p. 7-9.)

Q Did you receive an instruction from the sender to set the fax to receive?

A Press [RX Start]. (See "Fax Information Services," on p. 7-9.)

Documents cannot be sent overseas (error code #018).

Q Is a pause inserted in the fax number?

A Insert a pause after the access number of the telephone company that you want to use to
perform international communication, or after the fax number of the other party, then dial the
number again. (See "Specifying a Fax Number," on p. 2-6.)

A Change the Long Distance setting on the Option screen if you are sending documents using the
destination list in the Address Book. To access the Long Distance setting, press (Additional
Functions) 1 [Address Book Settings] 1 [Register Address] 1 [Register New Address] 1 [Fax]
1 [Option]. (See "Editing Address Details," on p. 10-34.)
Troubleshooting

13

13-6 When Problems Occur


Error Messages
This section explains the various messages that appear on the touch panel display, along with
possible causes and remedies.
For explanations of messages that are not listed here, see the Reference Guide, Sending Guide,
and Network Guide.

Self-Diagnostic Display
Perform the necessary procedures according to the displayed self-diagnostic error message.
Self-diagnostic error messages appear on the touch panel display at the following times:
• When scanning or printing cannot be performed because of an operational error
• When you need to make a decision or take some action during scanning or printing
• When you need to make a decision or take some action while browsing the network
The following is a list of self-diagnostic error messages, along with their possible causes and
remedies.

Check the TCP/IP.

Cause The machine's TCP/IP is not operating.

Remedy Check the IP Address Settings (IP Address, DHCP, RARP, BOOTP) in TCP/IP Settings in
Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See Chapter 3,
"Using a TCP/IP Network," in the Network Guide.)

Troubleshooting

13

Error Messages 13-7


Cannot find the selected server. Check the settings.

Cause 1 The IP address that the machine should connect to cannot be determined.

Remedy 1 Check the DNS Server Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from
the Additional Functions screen). (See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP Network," in the Network
Guide.)

Remedy 2 Check whether the DNS server's DNS settings are correct.

Cause 2 If <Login Information> in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) is set to 'Use (security auth.)' for the LDAP server, the machine will not be able
to determine the host name.

Remedy Check the DNS Server Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from
the Additional Functions screen). (See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP Network," in the Network
Guide.)

Cannot connect to the selected server. Check the settings.

Cause Cannot connect to the specified IP address/port.

Remedy 1 Check the Gateway Address setting in IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network
Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See Chapter 3, "Using a
TCP/IP Network," in the Network Guide.)

Remedy 2 Check the Server Address and Port Number in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from
the Additional Functions screen). (See "Registering an LDAP Server," on p. 11-52.)

Remedy 3 Check whether the LDAP server is operating normally.

Remedy 4 If <Login Information> in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) is set to 'Use (security auth.)' for the LDAP server, check whether UDP
packages are blocked by the filter.
Troubleshooting

13

13-8 Error Messages


Check the user name and password or check settings.

Cause 1 When setting <Login Information> of the LDAP server to 'Use' or 'Use (security auth.)', the user
name or password is incorrect.

Remedy Check the User and Password settings when <Login Information> in Register LDAP Server in
System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use' or 'Use (security auth.)'.

Cause 2 When setting <Login Information> of the LDAP server to 'Use (security auth.)', the domain name
is incorrect.

Remedy Check the Domain Name setting when <Login Information> in Register LDAP Server in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use (security auth.)'. (See "Registering
an LDAP Server," on p. 11-52.)

Cannot complete searching due to timeout. Check the settings.

Cause The search could not complete within the time specified under <Search Timeout>.

Remedy Increase the time setting for <Search Timeout> in Register LDAP Server in System Settings
(from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Registering an LDAP Server," on p. 11-52.)

The number of search results has exceeded limits. Change search conditions and try again.

Cause The number of addresses that meet the search criteria exceeds the specified maximum number
of addresses to search.

Remedy 1 Narrow down the search criteria, and then search again.

Remedy 2 Increase the maximum number of addresses to search. (See "Registering an LDAP Server," on
p. 11-52.)

Troubleshooting

13

Error Messages 13-9


Search condition includes characters that cannot be used with the selected server.

Cause 1 "\" is used in the search criterion.

Remedy Remove "\" from the search criterion, and search again.

Cause 2 The combination of characters used in the search criterion does not constitute an acceptable
search criterion.
- There is an unequal number of "(" and ")".
- "*" is not placed within "( )".

Remedy Make sure that the characters for the search criterion are combined properly, and search again.

Cause 3 If <Server LDAP version and character code> is set to 'ver.2 (JIS)', characters other than ASCII
Code (0x20-0x7E) are being used.

Remedy Omit characters that cannot be used, and search again.

Cannot start searching because the version setting for the server is incorrect. Check the settings.

Cause Although 'ver.3' is set for <Server LDAP version and character code> in Register LDAP Server in
System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the LDAP server is running on version 2.

Remedy Set <Server LDAP version and character code> in Register LDAP Server in System Settings
(from the Additional Functions screen) to 'ver.2'. (See "Registering an LDAP Server," on
p. 11-52.)
Troubleshooting

13

13-10 Error Messages


List of Error Codes without Messages
If an error occurs while a document is being sent or received, an error code is displayed on the job
log accessed on the System Monitor screen, as well as being included in the various reports.
Check what the error code is and take the required steps to solve the problem. (See Chapter 8,
"Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status," and "Report and List Samples," on p. 14-2.)

# 001

Cause Paper or originals are jammed.

Remedy Remove any jammed paper or originals.

# 003

Cause Communications that take longer than the preset time (64 minutes) caused the error.

Remedy 1 Reduce the resolution, and try sending the document again. (See "Resolution," on p. 3-16.)

Remedy 2 When receiving a document, ask the remote party to either reduce the resolution at which the
document is scanned, or divide the document into two or more parts before sending it.

# 005

Cause 1 The other party did not answer within 35 seconds.

Remedy Confirm that the remote machine is able to communicate, and try again.

Cause 2 The receiving machine is not a G3 fax.

Remedy Check the type of receiving machine with the receiving party.

# 009

Troubleshooting
Cause 1 There is no paper.

Remedy Load paper.

Cause 2 The paper drawer is not correctly inserted into the machine.

Remedy Insert the paper drawer properly.

13

Error Messages 13-11


# 012

Cause The document could not be sent because the receiving fax machine was out of paper.

Remedy Ask the receiving party to load paper into their fax machine.

# 018

Cause 1 The receiving machine did not respond when your machine redialed.

Remedy Confirm that the receiving machine is able to communicate, and try again.

Cause 2 The documents could not be sent because the receiving machine was engaged.

Remedy Confirm that the receiving machine is able to communicate, and try again.

Cause 3 The settings on your machine do not match the settings on the receiving machine.

Remedy Confirm that the receiving machine is able to communicate, and try again.

# 022

Cause 1 Forwarding could not be performed because all the addresses stored under the specified Group
destination have been deleted or User Inboxes are specified as the Group destination.

Remedy Try sending again.

Cause 2 Transmission could not be performed because the specified destination was deleted while the
send documents were waiting to be sent.

Remedy Try sending again.

# 037
Troubleshooting

Cause Documents could not be received because there was insufficient memory available.

Remedy Erase unwanted documents and documents with errors from memory in order to increase the
amount of available memory. (See "Erasing Received Documents," on p. 6-6, and Chapter 5,
"Using/Arranging Documents Stored in an Inbox," in the Mail Box Guide.)

13

13-12 Error Messages


# 080

Cause A subaddress is not set in the remote machine.

Remedy Check the subaddress of the remote machine, and try again.

# 081

Cause A password is not set in the remote machine.

Remedy Check the password of the remote machine, and try again.

# 099

Cause Sending was interrupted.

Remedy Try sending again.

# 102

Cause The subaddress and password do not match.

Remedy Check the subaddress and password of the remote machine, and try again.

# 107

Cause The document could not be sent because there was insufficient memory available.

Remedy 1 Try sending the document after memory copying is complete.

Remedy 2 Resend the document at a lower resolution.

Remedy 3 Erase unwanted documents in order to make memory available.

Troubleshooting
Remedy 4 If this problem occurs frequently, contact your local authorised Canon dealer.

# 701

Cause The specified Department ID does not exist, or the password has changed.

Remedy Enter the correct Department ID or password using - (numeric keys) on the control panel,
and try sending again.
13

Error Messages 13-13


# 702

Cause The document could not be sent because memory is full.

Remedy 1 Wait for a few moments and try again after other send jobs are complete.

Remedy 2 Do not send the document to too many recipients at the same time. Divide up the recipients and
send the document to a smaller number of recipients each time.

# 703

Cause Unable to write because the memory for image data is full.

Remedy 1 Wait for a few moments and try again after other send jobs are complete.

Remedy 2 Erase documents stored in inboxes. If the machine still does not operate normally, turn the main
power OFF and then back ON again.

# 704

Cause An error occurred while reading address information from the Address Book.

Remedy Check the address settings. If the machine still does not operate normally, turn the main power
OFF and then back ON again.

# 706

Cause The Address Book is being imported or exported from the Remote UI, or it is being used by
another sending component.

Remedy Try sending again.

# 711
Troubleshooting

Cause The inbox memory is full.

Remedy Erase the unnecessary documents stored in the inbox. (See "Erasing Received Documents," on
p. 6-6, and Chapter 5, "Using/Arranging Documents Stored in an Inbox," in the Mail Box Guide.)

# 712
13
Cause The maximum number of documents is already stored in the inbox.

Remedy Erase the unnecessary the unnecessary documents stored in the inbox. (See "Erasing Received
Documents," on p. 6-6, and Chapter 5, "Using/Arranging Documents Stored in an Inbox," in the
Mail Box Guide.)

13-14 Error Messages


# 829

Cause Data that contains more than 1,000 pages is received.

Remedy This machine can print or store up to 999 pages of data in memory, but will delete any data over
that amount. Ask the sender to resend the remaining pages.

# 851

Cause 1 There is insufficient remaining memory in the system.

Remedy Check the system's available memory, and delete unwanted documents in the inboxes.

Cause 2 The scanned document cannot be stored because there are more than 100 documents in the
specified inbox.

Remedy If there are a large number of documents, delete documents from the specified inbox.

# 852

Cause An error occurred because the main power switch was turned OFF while a job was being
processed.

Remedy Check to see if the main power switch is turned ON. Try processing the job again, if necessary.

# 995

Cause Reserved communication jobs were cleared.

Remedy Reserve the jobs again, if necessary.

Troubleshooting

13

Error Messages 13-15


Questions & Answers

Q Can the machine automatically resend documents when there are errors in transmission?
A Set Auto Redial in TX Settings under <Fax Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen). You can also make detailed settings, such as the redialing frequency and interval. (See
"Auto Redial," on p. 9-46.)

Q What happens to documents that are sent to my machine while the power switch on the control panel is
turned OFF?
A These documents are automatically stored and printed when all documents have been received.

Q What happens if fax documents arrive when the machine is being used for copying?
A While you are making copies, the documents are automatically received and stored in the machine's
memory, and will be printed automatically when you finish copying.
You can change the order in which these documents print. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the
Reference Guide.)

Q I frequently send documents using the same settings. Can the machine be set to automatically restore
those settings when the power is turned ON or after an operation completes?
A You can store the desired settings as a favorites button and recall them as needed. Alternatively, you can
set the desired settings as the Standard Send Settings so that they are always specified when the machine
is turned ON or after an operation completes.
Troubleshooting

Q What happens to received fax documents if a paper jam occurs while they are printing?
A If documents are not printed correctly, they are held in memory. When the paper jam is cleared, printing
resumes from the page at which the paper jam occurred.

13

13-16 Questions & Answers


Q What happens to a document that has not been completely received when a blackout occurs?

A The document, up to the page that was successfully received, is printed.

Q What happens to documents in memory and the memory settings if power is interrupted?

A Documents that are stored in the system's memory remain in the memory even when power to the
machine is interrupted. Similarly, the contents of the Address Book are also stored permanently in
memory. However, if power is interrupted while a document is being received, it is not stored in memory.

Q How can I save paper?


A You can set for received documents to be printed on both sides of the paper. (See "Two-Sided Printing," on
p. 9-28.)
You can set for received documents to be forwarded to e-mail destinations, or receive documents in
memory and then send them to the desired destinations. (See "Forwarding Settings," on p. 11-26 and
Chapter 5, "Using/Arranging Documents Stored in an Inbox," in the Mail Box Guide.)
You can also set the output of a report to 'Off'. For example, if an error occurs when sending by fax, both
Send TX Report and Fax TX Report are printed. However, you can set one type of report output to 'Off' to
save paper. (See "Specifying Report Settings," on p. 12-4.)

Q Can I turn the machine's power OFF if a document is set with the Delayed Send setting?

A When you are not using the machine, you may turn OFF the control panel power switch on the control
panel, but leave the main power switch turned ON. Documents that are set with the Delayed Send setting
are automatically sent from memory when the specified time arrives.

Troubleshooting

13

Questions & Answers 13-17


Troubleshooting

13

13-18 Questions & Answers


Appendix
This chapter provides the reports and lists of activity management, specifications, and index.
14 CHAPTER

Report and List Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2


Send Job List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Send TX Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Fax TX Report/Fax Error TX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Multiple Communication Result Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Fax RX Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
Confidential Fax Inbox Reception Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Fax Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Forwarding Conditions List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
Registered LDAP Server List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Address Book List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
User's Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21

14-1
Report and List Samples

Send Job List


You can view the list of Send jobs and their statuses. The Send Job List can be printed from the
System Monitor screen. (See "Printing the Send Job Status/Log," on p. 8-15.)

21/04 2003 MON 15:49 iR C3200 001

SEND JOB LIST

SET TIME ST. TIME DESTINATION ADDRESS DESTINATION ID JOB NO. MODE PGS.
21/04 15:49 22:00 0123456789 Canon U.S.A 0001 TX FAX 1
01 TX BOX
0987654321 Canon CANADA TX FAX
0112223333 Canon EUROPE TX FAX

NOTE
• If the optional Colour Universal Send Kit is installed, the results of e-mail, I-fax, and file server transmissions also are
displayed. (See Chapter 13, "Appendix," in the Sending Guide.)
• The addresses used in the above report are fictitious.

n SET TIME
The date and time that the send job was specified is printed in 24-hour notation.

n ST. TIME
The time (in 24-hour notation) at which the documents started to transmit is printed. The Start
Time is printed only for send jobs that have been set with the Delayed Send setting.

n DESTINATION ADDRESS
The address of the recipient is printed.

n DESTINATION ID
The name of the recipient is printed.

n JOB NO.
Appendix

The four digit number, that is automatically assigned when the document is accepted for
sending, is printed.

14

14-2 Report and List Samples


n MODE
The type and mode of transmission are printed.
Transmission type: Send (TX)
Mode of transmission: FAX, BOX

n PGS.
The number of pages that were sent successfully to the remote party, is printed.

NOTE
If a field exceeds its display capacity, only those characters that fit on the display are printed.

Send TX Report
The Send TX Report is a printed report that informs you of whether a send job is successfully
delivered to its destination.
You can set that a Send TX Report is automatically printed after each job is sent or only when there
are errors in transmission. (See "Send TX Report," on p. 12-4.)

21/04 2003 MON 15:30 iR c3200 001

TX REPORT

JOB NO. 0108


DEPT. ID 1234
ST. TIME 21/04 15:30
PGS. 1
SEND DOCUMENT NAME test

TX/RX INCOMPLETE -----


TRANSACTION OK Canon U.S.A. 0123456789
BOX 01
ERROR -----

NOTE
• The default settings are:
- TX Report: For Error Only
- Error Copy Print (Black Only): On
• If the optional Colour Universal Send Kit is installed, the results of e-mail, I-fax, and file server transmissions also are
displayed. (See Chapter 13, "Appendix," in the Sending Guide.)
• The address used in the above report is fictitious.

n JOB NO.
Appendix

The four digit number, that is automatically assigned when the document is accepted for
sending, is printed.

14

Report and List Samples 14-3


n DEPT. ID
If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed.

n ST. TIME
The date and time (in 24-hour notation) at which the documents started to transmit are printed.
The Start Time is printed only for send jobs that have been set with the Delayed Send setting.

n PGS.
The number of pages that were sent successfully to the remote party, is printed.

n SEND DOCUMENT NAME


The name given to the document when the send settings were specified, is printed.

n TX/RX INCOMPLETE
If transmission has been interrupted, the name and address of the destination are printed.

n TRANSACTION OK
If transmission has been completed successfully, the name and address of the destination are
printed.

n ERROR
The name and address of the destination of an error transmission are printed.

NOTE
If a field exceeds its display capacity, only those characters that fit on the display are printed.
Appendix

14

14-4 Report and List Samples


Fax TX Report/Fax Error TX Report
This report indicates items, such as the fax number of the party to which you sent documents, the
result of communication, and other information, to enable you to check whether the documents
were sent correctly to the intended destination.
You can set whether to automatically print a Fax TX Report after sending documents. (See "Fax TX
Report," on p. 12-9.)

21/04 2003 MON 13:43 FAX 01234567890 iR C3200 001

FAX TX REPORT

TRANSMISSION OK

JOB NO. 0064


DEPT. NO 123
DESTINATION ADDRESS 0987654321
PSWD/SUBADDRESS
DESTINATION ID Canon
ST. TIME 21/04 13:42
USAGE T 00’08
PGS. 1
RESULT OK

NOTE
• The default setting for printing the Fax TX Report is 'For Error Only'.
• You can also print a Fax TX Report with the first part of the sent document attached to it. (See "Fax TX Report," on
p. 12-9.)
• The fax number used in the above report is fictitious.

n REPORT NAME
When the document transmission is completed successfully, a "FAX TX REPORT" is printed.
When a send error occurs, a "FAX ERROR TX REPORT" is printed.

n MESSAGE
A message describing the transmission result is printed.

n JOB NO.
The four digit number, that is automatically assigned when the document is accepted for
sending, is printed.

n DEPT. ID
If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed.
Appendix

n DESTINATION ADDRESS
The fax number of the transmission destination is printed up to the first 20 digits.

14

Report and List Samples 14-5


n PSWD/SUBADDRESS
A subaddress is printed, if specified.

n DESTINATION ID
The name of the remote party is printed.

n ST. TIME
The date and time (in 24-hour notation) at which the document started to transmit are printed.
The Start Time is printed only for send jobs that have been set with the Delayed Send setting.

n USAGE T
The time taken (in minutes and seconds) to send the document from start to finish is printed.

n PGS.
The number of pages that were sent successfully to the remote party is printed.

n RESULT
If the documents were transmitted successfully, "OK" is printed.

If a sending error occurred, "NG" (No Good) is printed.

If a sending error occurred, the page number in which the error occurred and the error code
number are printed.

Multiple Communication Result Report


This report is used to check whether documents were sent successfully to the intended
destinations when a sequential broadcast transmission was performed.
You can set whether to automatically print a Multiple Communication Result Report after sending
documents. (See "Fax TX Report," on p. 12-9.)

21/04 2003 MON 11:13 FAX 01234567890 iR C3200 001

FAX MULTI TX REPORT

JOB NO. 0142


DEPT. ID 123
PGS. 1
TX/RX INCOMPLETE 01234567890
TRANSACTION OK -----
ERROR 0987654321
Appendix

14

14-6 Report and List Samples


NOTE
• The default setting for printing of Result Report is 'For Error Only'.
• You can also print a Multi TX/RX Report with the first part of the sent document attached to it. (See "Fax TX Report,"
on p. 12-9.)
• The fax numbers used in the above report are fictitious.

n JOB NO.
A four digit number, that is automatically assigned when the document is accepted for sending,
is printed.

n DEPT. ID
If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed.

n PGS.
The number of pages that were sent successfully to the destinations is printed.

n TX/RX INCOMPLETE
The fax number and the name of the destination of an incompleted transmission are printed. If
there is no applicable destination, "_ _ _" is printed.

n TRANSACTION OK
The fax number and the name of the destination of a completed transmission are printed. If
there is no applicable destination, "_ _ _" is printed.

n ERROR
The fax number and the name of the destination of an error transmission are printed. If there is
no applicable destination, "_ _ _" is printed.

Appendix

14

Report and List Samples 14-7


Fax RX Report
This report is used to check if documents were received successfully by this machine.
You can set whether to automatically print a Fax RX Report. (See "Fax RX Report," on p. 12-15.)

21/04 2003 MON 13:03 FAX 01234567890 iR C3200 001

FAX RX REPORT

RECEPTION OK

JOB NO. 5002


DESTINATION ADDRESS 01234567890
PSWD/SUBADDRESS
DESTINATION ID Canon
ST. TIME 21/04 13:02
USAGE T 00’14
PGS. 1
RESULT OK

NOTE
• The default setting for printing of Fax RX Report is 'Off'. (See "Fax RX Report," on p. 12-15.)
• The fax number used in the above report is fictitious.

n REPORT NAME
A FAX RX REPORT is printed when the reception of the document is completed successfully,
and also when a receiving error occurs.

n MESSAGE
A message describing the reception result is printed.

n JOB NO.
The four digit number, that is automatically assigned when the document is accepted for
sending, is printed.

n DESTINATION ADDRESS
The fax number of the sender is printed, up to the first 20 digits.

n PSWD/SUBADDRESS
A subaddress is printed, if specified.

n DESTINATION ID
Appendix

The name of the sender is printed.

14

14-8 Report and List Samples


n ST. TIME
The date and time (in 24-hour notation) at which the document started to be received are
printed.

n USAGE T
The time taken (in minutes and seconds) to receive the document from start to finish is printed.

n PGS.
The number of pages that were received successfully is printed.

n RESULT
If the documents were received successfully, "OK" is printed.

If a reception error occurred, "NG" (No Good) is printed.

If a reception error occurred, the page number in which the error occurred, and the error code
number are printed.

Confidential Fax Inbox Reception Report


This report enables you to confirm that documents were received in a Confidential Fax Inbox.
You can set whether to automatically print a Confidential Fax Inbox Reception Report. (See
"Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report," on p. 12-17.)

21/04 2003 MON 13:53 FAX 01234567890 iR C3200 001

CONFIDENTIAL FAX INBOX RX REPORT

MAILBOX # #01
BOX NAME BOX01
JOB NO. 5006
DESTINATION ADDRESS 0987654321
PSWD/SUBADDRESS @
DESTINATION ID Canon
ST. TIME 21/04 13:53
USAGE T 00’14
PGS. 1
RESULT OK

NOTE
• The default setting for printing a Confidential Fax Inbox Reception Report is 'On'. (See "Confidential Fax Inbox RX
Report," on p. 12-17.)
Appendix

• The fax number used in the above report is fictitious.

14

Report and List Samples 14-9


n MAILBOX #
The number of the Confidential Fax Inbox (00 to 49) in which the documents were received is
printed.

n BOX NAME
The user-assigned name of the Confidential Fax Inbox in which the documents were received is
printed.

n JOB NO.
The four digit number, that is automatically assigned when the document is accepted for
sending, is printed.

n DESTINATION ADDRESS
The fax number of the sender is printed up to the first 20 digits.

n PSWD/SUBADDRESS
A subaddress is printed, if specified.

n DESTINATION ID
The name of the sender is printed.

n ST. TIME
The date and time (in 24-hour notation) at which the document started to be received are
printed.

n USAGE T
The time taken (in minutes and seconds) to receive the document from start to finish is printed.

n PGS.
The number of pages that were received successfully is printed.

n RESULT
If the documents were received successfully, "OK" is printed.

If a reception error occurred, "NG" (No Good) is printed.

If a reception error occurred, the page number in which the error occurred, and the error code
number are printed.
Appendix

14

14-10 Report and List Samples


Activity Report
This report is a list which enables you to check the results of all sending and receiving transactions.
An Activity Report can be printed either automatically or manually.
An Activity Report is automatically printed when either the number of communication results
reaches 100, or a specified time is reached. The send and receive logs can also be printed
separately.
An Activity Report can be printed manually at any time from the System Monitor screen. (See
"Printing the Send Job Status/Log," on p. 8-15.)

21/04 2003 MON 15:30 iR C3200 001

ACTIVITY REPORT TX/RX

DEPT. ID : 511008

ST. TIME DESTINATION ADDRESS DESTINATION ID JOB NO. MODE PGS. RESULT
*10/04 12:51 0987654321 Canon CANADA 0007 TX 0 NG 00’00
STOP
*10/04 15:03 01 0008 TX BOX 1 OK 00’00
*10/04 15:03 0123456789 Canon U.S.A 0009 TX ECM 0 NG 00’00
1234567890 #102
*10/04 15:03 0123456789 Canon U.S.A 0010 TX ECM 0 NG 00’00
1234567890 2 #995
*10/04 15:03 0123456789 Canon U.S.A 0011 TX ECM 1 OK 00’18
*10/04 15:04 0112223333 Canon EUROPE 5005 RX ECM 1 OK 00’22
*10/04 15:05 0123456789 Canon U.S.A 5006 RX ECM 2 OK 00’22
*10/04 15:05 0987654321 Canon CANADA 0012 TX OK 00’24
*10/04 15:30 01 0013 TX BOX 1 NG 00’00

*10/04 15:47 0123456789 Canon TX 1 OK 00’44


*10/04 15:48 0123456789 Canon U.S.A 0016 TX 0 OK 00’20

NOTE
• The default settings are:
- Auto Print: On
- Daily Activity Report Time: Off
- Send/Receive Separate: (Not selected)
• If the optional Colour Universal Send Kit is installed, the results of e-mail, I-fax addresses, and file server transmissions
are printed in the same way. (See Chapter 13, "Appendix," in the Sending Guide.)
• The addresses used in the above report are fictitious.

n DEPT. ID
If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed. Transmission logs are listed
according to Department ID.
Appendix

14

Report and List Samples 14-11


n ST. TIME
The date and time (in 24-hour notation) at which the documents started to transmit are printed.
An asterisk (*) indicates a job that has already been printed.

n DESTINATION ADDRESS
The fax number of the recipient is printed.
• If the send job is sent to a fax number:
If subaddress is specified for sending fax, it is printed on the second line.

n DESTINATION ID
The name of the recipient is printed.

n JOB NO.
The four digit number, that is automatically assigned when the document is accepted for
sending or receiving, is printed. Numbers between 0001 and 4999 are for sending, while
numbers between 5001 and 9999 are for receiving.

n MODE
The type and mode of transmission are printed.
Transmission type: Send (TX), Receive (RX)
Mode of transmission: BOX, FAX, G3, ECM

IMPORTANT
If the optional Colour Universal Send Kit is installed, FTP, SMB, IPX, I-FAX, and MAIL are also displayed. (See
Chapter 13, "Appendix," in the Sending Guide.)

n PGS.
The number of pages that were sent or received successfully, is printed.

n RESULT
"OK" or "NG" and the transmission time are printed.
If the documents have been successfully received by the recipient, "OK" is printed.
If a sending error occurred, "NG" (No Good) is printed, and the error code is printed on the
second line.

NOTE
If a field exceeds its display capacity, only those characters that fit on the display are printed.
Appendix

14

14-12 Report and List Samples


Fax Activity Report
The Fax Activity Report is a printed log that shows the results of send and receive jobs. A Fax
Activity Report can be printed either automatically or manually.
A Fax Activity Report is automatically printed when either the number of communication results
reaches 40, or a specified time is reached. You can set whether to automatically print a Fax Activity
Report. (See "Fax Activity Report," on p. 12-12.)

21/04 2003 MON 14:20 FAX 01234567890 iR C3200 001

FAX ACTIVITY REPORT TX/RX

DEPT. ID :123
ST. TIME CONNECTION TEL/ID NO. MODE PGS. RESULT
*07/04 13:20 Canon CANADA 1234567890 0007 TX 0 NG 00’00
0 STOP
*07/04 13:35 Canon EUROPE 0112223333 0008 TX ECM 1 OK 00’24
*07/04 13:36 Canon U.S.A 0987654321 0008 TX ECM 0 NG 00’11
0 #102
07/04 13:38 Canon U.S.A 0987654321 0009 TX 0 NG 00’00
0 #995
07/04 13:40 Canon U.S.A 0987654321 0010 TX ECM 1 OK 00’18
07/04 13:52 Canon EUROPE 0112223333 5005 MEMORY LOCK ECM 1 OK 00’22
08/04 13:53 Canon FRANCE 0223334444 5006 MEMORY LOCK ECM 1 OK 00’22
09/04 11:42 Canon CANADA 1234567890 0011 TX 1 OK 00’24
09/04 13:12 Canon U.S.A 0987654321 0012 TX 2 OK 00’44
09/04 13:38 Canon U.S.A 0987654321 0013 TX 1 OK 00’20
09/04 15:10 Canon U.S.A 0987654321 0014 TX ECM 1 OK 00’24

NOTE
• The default setting of the Auto Print function is 'On'.
• The fax numbers used in the above report are fictitious.

n DEPT. ID
If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed. Transmission logs are listed
according to the Department ID.

n ST. TIME
The date and time (in 24-hour notation) at which the documents started to transmit are printed.
An asterisk (*) indicates a job that has already been printed.

n CONNECTION TEL/ID
The name and fax number of the remote party are printed. If a subaddress or sender's name has
been specified, it is printed beneath the fax number.
Appendix

n JOB NO.
The four digit number, that is automatically assigned when the document is accepted for
sending or receiving, is printed. Numbers between 0001 and 4999 are for sending, while
numbers between 5001 and 9999 are for receiving.
14

Report and List Samples 14-13


n MODE
The communicated contents and the Communication mode are printed.
Sending: TX, DELAYED TX, SEQ. BROADCAST, DELAYED SEQUENTIAL
BROADCAST, MEMORY BOX TX, MEMORY SENDING, TRANSFER TX,
REPORT TX, DIRECT TX
Receiving: AUTO RX, FAX INBOX RX, MEMORY BOX RX, MEMORY LOCK, TRANSFER
RX
Communication mode: ECM

n PGS.
The number of pages that were sent or received successfully is printed.

n RESULT
"OK" or "NG" and the transmission time are printed.
If a sending error occurred, "NG" (No Good) is printed, and the error code is printed on the
second line.
Appendix

14

14-14 Report and List Samples


Forwarding Conditions List
You can print the contents of the forwarding settings that have been specified. Manually print the
Forwarding Conditions List whenever necessary. (See "Printing Forwarding Settings," on p. 11-50.)

21/04 2003 MON 15:30 iR C3200 001

FORWARDING CONDITIONS LIST

CONDITION NAME FORWARD W/O CONDITIONS (FAX RX)


ON/OFF OFF
FORWARDING DESTINATION
FWDING DESTIN. TYPE FAX
FWDING DESTIN. NAME Tom
SEND DOCUMENT NAME TEST1
STORE/PRINT RECEIVED DOC. OFF

CONDITION NAME test


ON/OFF OFF
FORWARDING CONDITIONS
RECEIVE TYPE FAX
FAX NUMBER DISREGARDED
SUBADDRESS DOES NOT EXIST
PASSWORD DOES NOT EXIST
FORWARDING DESTINATION
FWDING DESTIN. TYPE FAX
FWDING DESTIN. NAME Tom
SEND DOCUMENT NAME TEST2
STORE/PRINT RECEIVED DOC. OFF
FORWARDING TIME EVERYDAY 00:00-10:00
FORWARDING DONE NOTICE -
NOTICE ONLY FOR ERRORS -

NOTE
The fax numbers used in the above report are fictitious.

Appendix

14

Report and List Samples 14-15


Registered LDAP Server List
You can print the LDAP server settings by manually specifying for the Registered LDAP Server List
to be printed. (See "Printing LDAP Server Settings," on p. 11-70.)

21/04 2003 MON 15:30 iR C3200 001

REGISTRED LDAP SERVER LIST

SERVER NAME abc


SERVER ADDRESS hostname.canon.com
LOCATION TO START SEARCH “ou=ffm, o=mip”
USE SSL Off
PORT NUMBER 389
MAX. NO. OF ADDRESSES TO SEARCH 100
SEARCH TIMEOUT 60 sec.
LOGIN INFORMATION USE
USER abcdefg
DISPLAY AUTHENT. DIALOG WHEN SEARCHING Off
SERVER LDAP VERSION AND CHARACTER CODE VER. 3 (UTF-8)

SERVER NAME def


SERVER ADDRESS 177.22.32.64
LOCATION TO START SEARCH “ou=ffm, o=mip”
USE SSL Off
PORT NUMBER 389
MAX. NO. OF ADDRESSES TO SEARCH 200
SEARCH TIMEOUT 120 sec.
LOGIN INFORMATION DO NOT USE
SERVER LDAP VERSION AND CHARACTER CODE VER. 3 (UTF-8)

SERVER NAME ghi


SERVER ADDRESS hostname.canon.com
LOCATION TO START SEARCH “DC=mip, DC=ffm, DC=canon, DC=com”
USE SSL Off
PORT NUMBER 389
MAX. NO. OF ADDRESSES TO SEARCH 100
SEARCH TIMEOUT 180 sec.
LOGIN INFORMATION USE (SECURITY AUTHENTICATION)
USER hijklm
DOMAIN NAME ffm.canon.com
DISPLAY AUTHENT. DIALOG WHEN SEARCHING Off
SERVER LDAP VERSION AND CHARACTER CODE VER. 3(UTF-8)
Appendix

14

14-16 Report and List Samples


Address Book List
You can print the contents of the Address Book (subaddress books 1 to 10 or one-touch buttons).
Manually print the list of selected Address Book whenever necessary. (See "Address Book List," on
p. 12-19.)

21/04 2003 MON 15:30 iR C3200 001

ADDRESS BOOK LIST (1)

DESTINATION NAME CLASS DESTINATION ADDRESS


Canon U.S.A FAX 0123456789
GROUP GROUP
Canon CANADA FAX 0987654321
Canon CANADA FAX 0987654321
BOX 01
Canon CANADA FAX 0987654321
Canon EUROPE FAX 0112223333
project FAX 0123456789

NOTE
• If the optional Colour Universal Send Kit is installed, the destinations of e-mail, I-fax, and file server addresses are also
displayed. (See Chapter 13, "Appendix," in the Sending Guide.)
• The addresses used in the above report are fictitious.

n DESTINATION NAME
The name of the specified destination is printed.
When printing the contents of a one-touch button, the number of the one-touch button is printed
on the first line.

n CLASS
The specified destination's class (transmission mode) is printed.

n DESTINATION ADDRESS
• If the Class is 'FAX':
The fax number is printed on the first line, and the subaddress on the second line.
• If the Class is 'BOX':
The number of the User Inbox is printed.
• If the Class is 'GROUP':
The destinations stored in the group are printed on the second line and continues down in a
Appendix

list.
If a fax is stored in the group address, no additional information is printed on the second line.

14

Report and List Samples 14-17


User's Data List
The User's Data List prints out the Fax settings made in Communications Settings, Report
Settings, and System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). Manually print the User's
Data List whenever necessary. (See "User's Data List," on p. 12-21.)

21/04 2003 MON 15:30 iR C3200 001

USER’S DATA LIST (Communications)

Communications Settings
TX Settings
Sender’s Names (TTi) 01: Tokyo
02: New York
03: London
Unit Name Canon
Erase Failed TX On
Print Failed Forwarding Documents Off
Default Screen for Send New Address
TX Terminal ID Outside
RX Settings
Two-sided Print Off
Select Cassette
Switch A On
Switch B On
Switch C On
Switch D On
Receive Reduction On
Receive Reduction Auto
Reduce % 90%
Reduce Direction Vertical Only
Receive Page Footer On
2 ON 1 LOG Off

Report Settings
TX Report FOR ERROR ONLY
Error Copy Print (Black Only) On
Activity Report
Auto Print On
Daily Activity Report Time Off
Send/Receive Separate Off
Appendix

14

14-18 Report and List Samples


21/04 2003 MON 11:15 FAX 01234567890 iR C3200 001

USER’S DATA LIST (FAX)

1. COMMUNICATIONS SETTINGS
FAX SETTINGS
USER SETTINGS
UNIT TELEPHONE # 01234567890
VOLUME CONTROL
ALARM VOLUME 4
MONITOR VOL. 4
TEL LINE TYPE TONE
TX SETTINGS
ECM TX ON
PAUSE TIME 4 SEC
AUTO REDIAL ON
REDIAL TIMES 2 TIMES
REDIAL INTERVAL 2 MIN
TX ERROR RESEND ERROR & 1ST PAGE
TX TERMINAL ID ON
TTI IN/OUT SIDE OF IMAGE OUTSIDE
TELEPHONE # MARK FAX
RX SETTINGS
ECM RX ON

2. REPORT SETTINGS
SETTINGS
FAX
FAX TX REPORT FOR ERROR ONLY
ERROR COPY PRINT ON
FAX ACTIVITY REPORT
AUTO PRINT ON
TX/RX SEPARATE OFF
DAILY REPORT TIME OFF
FAX RX REPORT OFF
CONF. FAX INBOX RX REPORT ON

3. SYSTEM SETTINGS
COMMUNICATIONS SETTINGS
FAX SETTINGS
TX START SPEED 33600bps
RX START SPEED 33600bps
R-KEY SETTING PSTN
MEMORY RX INBOX SETTINGS
USE FAX MEMORY LOCK OFF
MEMORY LOCK START TIME OFF
MEMORY LOCK END TIME OFF

NOTE
The fax number used in the above report is fictitious.
Appendix

14

Report and List Samples 14-19


Specifications
The main specifications of this machine are shown below. Please note that the appearance and
specifications of the product are subject to change without prior notice.

Item Specifications
Name Super G3 FAX Board-M1
A3, A4, A4R, A5*, A5R*
Sending Original Sizes
*Sent as A4.
Receiving Paper Sizes A3, A4, A4R, A5, A5R
ECM-MMR: approximately 3.2 seconds
G3MR method: approximately 13 seconds
Transmission Times
G3MH method: approximately 13 seconds
JBIG: approximately 2.6 seconds
Standard: 8 pels*/mm × 3.85 line/mm
Scan line Density Fine: 8 pels*/mm × 7.7 line/mm
(Scan, Transmission) Super-Fine: 8 pels*/mm × 15.4 line/mm
Ultra-Fine: 16 pels*/mm × 15.4 line/mm
Telephone Line Used/Number of Lines Public Switched Telephone Network, Facsimile network 1 line
Address Book: 1800 destinations
Auto Dial Function
(including destinations stored in one-touch buttons)
Image Memory Approximately 3,700 pages

*Pels stands for picture elements (pixels).


Appendix

14

14-20 Specifications
Index

Numerics C
2 On 1 Log, 9-39 Cancelling a job
Using the Stop key, 1-43
Using the System Monitor screen, 1-44
Using the touch panel display, 1-42
A Communications Settings table, 9-2
Confidential Fax Inbox Reception Report
Access number management, 11-24
sample, 14-9
Activity Report, 12-6, 14-11
Contrast
Address Book
Adjusting, 4-24
About the Address Book, 10-3
High, 4-24
Access number management, 11-24
Low, 4-24
Address Book List sample, 14-17
Copyrights, xv
Address Book password, 11-22
Editing addresses, 10-34
Erasing addresses, 10-39
Naming an address book, 10-43 D
Printing the Address Book, 12-19
Registering new addresses, 10-4 Date and time, setting, 1-14
Address Book Settings table, 10-2 Default Send screen, 9-20
Address Book/Server key, 1-6 Destinations, checking/changing, 2-25
Automatic document deletion, 9-4 Destinations, erasing, 2-28
Destinations, specifying
About specifying destinations, 2-2
Using a server, 2-14
B Using the Address Book, 2-2
Using the Favorites Buttons, 2-12
Before using this machine
Using the New Address tab, 2-6
Registering sender names, 1-20
Using the One-touch Buttons, 2-10
Registering the machine's fax number, 1-18
Details key, 1-6
Appendix

Registering the Sending Record, 1-10


Dialling
Registering the unit's name, 1-23
Calling from an extension, 7-5
Selecting the type of telephone line, 1-11
International Dialling, 7-5
Setting the date and time, 1-14
Special dialling, 7-5
Setting the display language, 1-11
Different size originals, 4-17 14
Setting the line type, 1-10
Disclaimers, xv
Things to do, 1-10
Display language, setting, 1-11
Binding erase, 4-5, 4-13
Displays used in this manual, xii
Book frame erase, 4-5, 4-9

Index 14-21
Document Size Forwarding Conditions List sample, 14-15
About document sizes, 1-35, 3-7 Forwarding errors, handling, 9-7
Registering, 3-13 Forwarding settings
Specifying, 3-8 About forwarding settings, 11-26
Document Size Select key, 1-8 Checking/Changing, 11-46
Erasing, 11-49
Forwarding without conditions, 11-40
Printing, 11-50
E Storing, 11-27
Turning the forwarding function ON/OFF, 11-48
Erase key, 1-6
Frame erase
Error messages
About frame erase, 4-5
Error codes without messages, 13-11
Binding erase, 4-5, 4-13
Self-diagnostic display, 13-7
Book frame erase, 4-5, 4-9
Exposure key, 1-8
Original frame erase, 4-5, 4-6

F I
Favorites Buttons
Illustrations used in this manual, xiii
About Favorites Buttons, 9-11
Image quality adjustment, 4-27
Erasing, 9-17
International dialling
Naming, 9-15
About international dialling, 7-5
Registering, 9-11
Storing international fax numbers, 7-7
Favorites Buttons key, 1-7
Fax Activity Report sample, 14-13
Fax Basic Features screen, 1-6
Fax information services, 7-9 J
Fax jobs
Checking fax job details, 8-17 Job build, 4-19
Checking/Changing the status of fax jobs, 8-17 Job recall, 5-16
Printing the Fax Activity Report, 8-21
Fax number, registering, 1-18
Fax RX Report sample, 14-8
Fax settings K
Adjusting the alarm and monitor volume, 9-41
Keys used in this manual, xii
Appendix

Auto redial, 9-46


ECM reception, 9-50
ECM transmission, 9-43
Pause time, 9-45 L
Reception password, 11-4
14
R-key setting, 11-4 LDAP server settings
Send/Receive start speed, 11-4 About LDAP server settings, 11-52
Fax TX Report/Fax Error TX Report sample, 14-5 Changing an LDAP server setting, 11-67
Feeder, 1-35, 1-40 Erasing an LDAP server, 11-69
Flow of fax sending operations, 1-25 Printing LDAP server settings, 11-70
Footer information, printing, 9-37 Registering an LDAP server, 11-52

14-22 Index
Legal notices Original frame erase, 4-5, 4-6
Copyrights, xv Original type
Disclaimers, xv Photo mode, 3-20
R&TTE Directive, xiii Selecting, 3-20
Super G3, xiv Text mode, 3-20
Trademarks, xiv Text/Photo mode, 3-20
Line type, setting, 1-10 Original Type drop-down list, 1-8
Overview, 1-5

M
P
Memory RX Inbox settings
About Memory RX Inbox settings, 11-11 Paper drawer selection, 9-30
Memory lock end time, 11-18 Paper sizes, 6-9
Memory lock start time, 11-14 Photo mode, 3-20
Setting a password, 11-11 Placing originals
Settings for storing received faxes in About placing originals, 1-35
memory, 11-13 Document size, 1-35
Multiple Communication Result Report Feeder, 1-35, 1-40
sample, 14-6 Orientation, 1-36
Platen glass, 1-35, 1-37
Platen glass, 1-35, 1-37
Prevent bleeding, 4-27
N Preview key, 1-7
Previewing originals, 5-12
New Address key, 1-7
New addresses, specifying
Fax number, 2-6
User Inbox, 2-9 Q
New addresses, storing
Addresses obtained via a server, 10-21 Q&A, 13-16
Fax numbers, 10-4
Group addresses, 10-12

R
O R&TTE Directive, xiii
Appendix

Recall key, 1-6


One-touch Buttons Receive jobs
About One-touch Buttons, 2-10 Checking receive job details, 8-23
Erasing, 10-66 Checking the status of forwarded jobs, 8-28
Registering/Editing, 10-45 Checking the status of receive jobs, 8-23 14
One-touch Buttons key, 1-7 Printing the receive job log, 8-26
Orientation
Horizontal placement, 1-36
Vertical placement, 1-36

Index 14-23
Receiving documents Two-sided originals, 3-5
About receiving documents, 6-2 Scan Settings screen, 1-8
Erasing received documents, 6-6 Send Job List sample, 14-2
Forwarding received documents, 6-5 Send jobs
Processing received documents, 6-4 Changing the destination, 8-7
Reducing a received document, 9-33 Checking send job details, 8-2
Setting the Memory Lock mode, 6-5 Checking/Changing the status of send jobs, 8-2
What happens when documents are Printing the send job status/log, 8-15
received, 6-2 Resending a job, 8-11
Registered LDAP Server List sample, 14-16 Send Settings key, 1-7
Report settings Send TX Report, 12-4, 14-3
Activity Report, 12-6 Sender names, registering, 1-20
Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report, 12-17 Sending documents
Fax Activity Report, 12-12 Delaying a send job, 5-8
Fax RX Report, 12-15 Sending a fax, 5-2
Fax TX Report, 12-9 Sending a job to a User Inbox, 5-5
Send TX Report, 12-4 Sending with a subaddress, 7-2
Specifying, 12-4 Sending record, registering, 1-10
Report Settings table, 12-2 Sharpness, 4-24
Resolution, 3-16 Special Features key, 1-9
Resolution drop-down list, 1-8 Specifications, 14-20
Standard send settings, 9-9
Store/Erase key, 1-8
Subaddress, sending with, 7-2
S Super G3, xiv
Symbols used in this manual, xi
Samples
System Monitor key, 1-9
Activity Report, 14-11
System Settings table, 11-2
Address Book List, 14-17
Confidential Fax Inbox Reception Report, 14-9
Fax Activity Report, 14-13
Fax RX Report, 14-8 T
Fax TX Report/Fax Error TX Report, 14-5
Forwarding Conditions List, 14-15 Telephone line, selecting type, 1-11
Multiple Communication Result Report, 14-6 Text mode, 3-20
Registered LDAP Server List, 14-16 Text/Photo mode, 3-20
Send Job List, 14-2 Trademarks, xiv
Appendix

Send TX Report, 14-3 Troubleshooting


User's Data List, 14-18 Error messages, 13-7
Scan exposure Other situations, 13-5
Automatic exposure adjustment, 3-23 Q&A, 13-16
14 Manual exposure adjustment, 3-18 Receiving documents, 13-4
Scan mode drop-down list, 1-6, 1-8 Sending documents, 13-2
Scan mode, selecting, 3-2 Two-page separation, 4-2
Scan settings Two-sided Original key, 1-7
Document size, 3-7 Two-sided printing, 9-28
Original type, 3-18 TX settings, initialising, 9-26
Resolution, 3-16 TX Terminal ID, printing, 9-22
Scan exposure, 3-18

14-24 Index
U
Unit name, registering, 1-23
User Preset keys
About User Preset keys, 4-31
Erasing scan settings, 4-37
Naming a User Preset key, 4-35
Storing scan settings, 4-31
User's data
Printing, 12-21
User's Data List sample, 14-18

Appendix

14

Index 14-25
Appendix

14

14-26 Index

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen